^^^EASrwt  f^oo\^ 


COL.  GEORGE  WASHINGTON  FLOWERS 
MEMORIAL  COLLECTION 


DUKE  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY 
DURHAM.  N.  C. 


PRESENTED  BY 

W.  W.  FLOWERS 


<..*»m  ^-^^r-S^ 


v^vV^-l^ 


^'^■•'t       *■ 


h 


ANDREWS' 


MOUNTED  AMILLERY  DRILL 


COMPILKD 


ACCOUBING  TO  TKE  LATEST  REGULATIONS 


FROM 


STANDARD     MILITARY     A  U  T  II  0  R  I  T  Y  , 


R.  SNOWDEN  ANDREWS, 


llt'JTtKAM-COLONLL  COMMaNMNG  UATTAUON  AraiLlEKT. 


CHARLESTON: 
KVANb     AND     COGSWELL. 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1863,  by 

R.    SNOWDEN    ANDREWS, 

In   the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  Confederate  States   for  the 

District  of  Charleston,  South  Carolina, 


Cf^^^t  ITt 


THE  ROWERS  COILECTWN 


*/<i2. 


^/e^-H- 


By  pcrniiysioii,  this  work  '\s  dcdicuted  to  "The 
Christijin  Soldier,"  Lieutenant- Gencrsil  T.  J.  Jack- 
son, by  his  hite  Chief  of  Division  Artillery,  as  a 
slight  token  of  appreciation  of  the  kindness  of  the 
following  complimentary  language:  "  For  Major 
Andrews'  gallant  and  meritorious  conduct  in  the 
Battle  of  Cedar  Run,  I  respectfully  recommend 
that  his  appointment  date  from  that  battle." 

However  worthless  this  work  in  itself  may  be, 
it  assumes  something  of  value  in  the  author's  eyes 
when  thus  rendered  a  tribute  of  respect  to  "  Old 
Stonewall." 

E.  SNOWDEN  ANDREWS, 

Licuttaani- Colonel  Comma, tdiiuj  Jiaitalion  Artillery. 

Milfonl,  April  11,  1863. 


294544 


-rtfia_2flTWn  WT 


\Mjjmi 


PREFACE. 


At  tlie  beginning  ol'  this  war,  the  onl}^  Light 
ArtiUery  work  of  any  diameter  in  cireuLation  was 
that  prepared  by  a  boai'il  of  United  States  Artillery 
officers,  and  prescribed  by  the  United  States  govern- 
ment. By  the  many  references  to  the  modifications 
referring  to  Horse  Artillery  (of  which  there  were 
none  at  that  time  in  the  United  States  army,  and 
are  at  this  time  but  three  in  the  Confederate  States 
army — the  command  of  the  gallant  Pelham),  and  by 
the  insertion  of  details  respecting  it,  together  with 
constant  references  to  other  movements  described  in 
other  parts  of  the  book,  the  explanations  of  the 
various  manoeuvres  were  found  to  be  complex  and 
confusing.  A  large  quantity  of  Ordnance  matter, 
useful  in  its  proper  place  but  cumbersome  in  a  book 
of  tactics,  was  inserted  in  this  work,  taken  from 
the  United  States  Ordnance  Manual.  In  the  battles 
before  Richmond,  where  the  1st  Maryland  Artillery 
compan}',  under  my  command,  had  the  high  honor, 


G  PREFACE. 

•  at  Mechanicsvillc,  of  firino-  the  first  ii:iin,  the  fortune 
of  war  tlirew  into  my  hands  a  little  work  on  Field 
Artillery,  b}^  j\[r.  Patten,  late  oificer  United  States 
armj^,  published  in  New  York,  in  I^ovember,  1861. 
This  contained  every  manoeuvre  of  the  other,  with 
a  clear  and  simple  explanation,  complete  in  itself, 
without  the  necessity  of  reference  to  other  parts  of 
the  book,  and  omitting  the  details  and  modifications 
in  reference  to  Horse  Artiller}'-,  and  met  most  of  the 
objections  to  the  other  work.  It  possessed  over  the 
other  a  great  merit  in  the  engravings,  illustrating 
correctly  the  several  members  of  the  gun  detachment, 
in  all  the  various  positions  they  have  respectively 
to  assume  while  serving  and  discharging  the  piece. 
This  was  accurately  done  by  means  of  photograph3\ 
Valuable  as  I  found  this  book,  it  was  incomplete — 
omitting  the  necessary  and  essential  bugle  calls  for 
drill,  camp,  and  field  duties.  These  have  been  sup- 
plied in  this  work.  Since  November  1,  1861,  the 
necessities  of  the  service  have  introduced  new  guuSi 
the  modifications  to  orabrace  these  have  also  been 
^tjppUecl,  particularly  in  i'efevence  to  tho  light  12- 
poundor,  or  Napoleon  gun.  This  gun  was  introduced 
by  mo  ittto  the  Confedomte  service— three  of  thorn, 
under  an  order  from  Governor  Letohor,  having  been 
made  for  me^  from  drawings  furnished  by  myself,  at 


PREFACE.  7 

the  Tredeo;nr  worlds,  in  Juno  and  July,  18G1,  and  used 
at  Evansport  in  the  fall  and  winter  of  18G1  and  1862. 
Latel}^  our  G-poundei\s  and  12-poundei'  howitzers  have 
been  or  are  being  i-eeast  into  Naj^oleon  g-nns  of  \ny 
pattern — the  ITnited  States  pattern  slightly  modified. 
A  few  pages  referring  to  tiie  organization,  equip- 
ment, and  management  of  a  mounted  battery,  and 
the  care  and  pi'eservation  of  artillery  horses,  will,  I 
trust,  be  useful,  though  somewhat  out  of  place  in  a 
book  of  tactics.  This  work  agrees  in  every  essential 
particular  with  the  one  prepared  by  the  board  of 
United  States  officers.  It  would  have  been  better  to 
have  had  wood-cut  ratlier  than  lithographic  illustra- 
tions, as  the  cuts  would  then  have  been  on  the  same 
page  with  the  explanations  of  the  various  manoeuvres 
The  blockade  renders  this  at  this  time  impossible. 
Whatever  of  merit  there  may  be  in  this  compilation, 
the  public  are  for  it  indebted  to  the  cordial  approval 
of  the  plan,  when  suggested  b}'  me,  by  the  efficient 
head  of  Ordnance  Bureau,  Colonel  Josiah  Gorgas. 
11.  SNOWDEN  ANDEEWS, 

Ltfufenant-Coloucl  Commanding  Aiidreicn'  Battalion  Artillery. 

Mllford,  April  1 ,  1863. 


234544 


ARTILLERY    DRILL. 


Pakt    First. 
SCHOOL  OF  THE  PIECE. 

Article  I. 

NOMENCLATURE  AND  GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 

The  troops  of  the  Artillery  are  divided  into  two 
kinds,  viz  :  Foot  ArtUler}/,  and  Light  or  Field  Artillery. 

To  the  Foot  Artillery  belong  the  service  of  siege, 
sea-coast,  garrison,  and  mountain  artillery,  rocket  bat- 
teries, and  the  artillery  duties  of  the  park. 

To  the  Field  Artillery  belongs  the  service  of  the  bat- 
teries which  manoexivre  with  the  troops  on  the  field  of  battle. 
It  is  divided  into  two  parts:  Horse  Artillery,  which  is 
generally  attached  to  and  manoeuvres  with  cavalry, 
the  cannoneers  being  mounted  on  horseback,  and 
Mounted  Artillery,  which  is  generally  attached  to  and 
manoeuvres  with  infantry,  the  cannoneers  marching  at 
the  sides  of  their  pieces,  or,  when  necessary,  mounting 
the  ammunition  chests.  As  this  last  division  consti- 
tutes the  only  Field  Artillery  used  in  the  service  (except 
two  companies  under  General  J.  E.  B.  Stuart),  the  in- 
struction in  this  book  will  be  in  reference  to  Mounted 
Artillery  alone. 


10  .SCHOOL    OF    THE    PIECE. 


The  (:fuN 


Figures  1  and  2.  The  term  Cannon  embraces  all 
kinds  of  lieavj^  ordnance,  guns,  howitzers,  mortars; 
each  is  mounted  on  a  carriage^  and  each  field  carriage 
has  a  limber. 

The  term  piece  is  applied  to  the  cannon,  and  is  also 
used  to  desio-nate  it  in  union  with  its  carriaa'e,  witli  or 
without  the  limber  attached. 

The  front  of  a  piece,  when  Umbered^  or  prepared  for 
moving,  is  the  direction  in  which  the  pole  points; 
when,  unlimbered,  or  prepared  for  action,  it  is  the 
direction  in  which  the  gun  points;  the  right  and  left 
are  in  each  case  determined  accordingly^ 

The  calibre  and  description  of  the  pieces  now  in 
use  in  the  service  of  the  Confederate  States  are  the 
(5-pounder  and  12-pounder  gun;  the  12-pounder,  24- 
pounder,  and  32-pounder  howitzer;  and  the  12-pound- 
er ligfd  gun,  or,  as  it  is  sometimes  called,  Napoleon. 
These  are  assembled  in  batteries  of  six  or  of  eight 
pieces  on  the  war  establishment,  of  which  four  or 
six  are  guns,  and  two  are  howitzers;  and  of  four 
pieces  on  the  peace  establishment,  of  which  three  are 
guns  and  one  a  howitzer.  The  12-pounder  guns  and 
24-pounder  or  32-pounder  howitzers  are  associated 
together  in  the  same  batteries,  which  are  called 
V2-2Wunder  batteries,  and  the  6-pounder  guns  and  12- 
pounder  howitzers  are  associated  together  in  like 
manner,  and  called  (S-pounder  batteries. 

Howitzers  are  cannon  formed  with  chambers  for  the 
reception  of  the  cartridge.     Figure  2. 

The  bore  is  the  interior  hollow  cylinder  which  re- 
ceives the  charge.  It  includes  all  the  part  bored  out, 
viz:  the  cylinder.,  the  cliamhcr.  if  there  is  one,  and  the 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    PIECE.  11 

curved  surfiice  connecting  them.  The  bottom  of  the 
bore  is  a  phmo  surface  perpendicuhar  to  the  axis.  Its 
diameter  is  somewhat  less  than  that  of  the  hore,  and 
is  united  with  the  sides  hy  a  curved  surfixce.  Tlie 
muzzle  is  the  entrance  of  the  bore. 

Tho'breech  is  the  mass  of  solid  metal  between  the 
bottom  of  the  bore  and  the  cascabel.  The  seat  for  the 
hausse  is  behind  the  base  of  the  breccii. 

T\\o  cascabel  is  the  projecting  part  which  terminates 
the  piece.  It  consists  of  the  knob,  the  ncc/c,  and  the 
Jillet. 

The  reinforce  is  the  thickest  part  of  the  body  of  the 

gun. 

The  chase  is  the  conical  part  of  the  gun  in  front  of 
the  reinforce. 

The  7icclc  is  the  smallest  part  of  the  piece  in  front  of 
the  astragal,  or  mouldings,  at  the  termination  of  the 
chase. 

The  swell  of  the  muzzle  is  the  large  part  of  the  gun 
in  front  of  the  neck;  it  gives  strength  to  the  gun  at 
its  termination,  and  facilitates  the  pointings;  the  muz- 
zle sight  is  screwed  into  it.  In  field  howitzers  a  mtizzle 
band  takes  the  place  of  the  swell  of  the  muzzle. 

The  face  is  the  front  plane  terminating  the  piece. 

The  trunnions  are  the  projecting  c^dinders  at  the 
sides  of  tlio  gun  which  support  it  on  its  carriage. 
Their  axos  are  in  one  line,  which  is  perpendicular  to 
the  axis  of  the  bore  and  iu  the  sumo  piano  with  it. 

Tho  rimbases  arc  the  short  cylinders  uniting  the 
ti'unnions  with  tho  body  of  tho  gun.  Their  ends,  or 
tho  shoulders  of  the  trunnions,  are  iu  planes  porpei^ 
dioular  to  tho  axis  of  tho  trunnions, 

Tho  vent  is  a  cylindrical  hole,  terminating  near  the 
bottom  of  the  bore,  through  Avhicl!  fire  is  conamuni- 


12  SCHOOL    OF    THE    PIECE. 

e'ated  to  the  charge.     It  is  bored  through  n  vent  piece 
of  wrought  copper,  wliich  is  screwed  into  the  gun. 

The  liandles  in  heavy  field  guns  are  used  in  the  me- 
chanical manoeuvres.      They  are  placed,   with  their 

centres,  over  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  piece. 

■* 

The  Carriage. 

Figure  8.  The  cheeks  are  two  pieces  of  wood  be- 
tween wliich  the  o-un  rests. 

The  ^tock  is  of  squared  wood,  in  two  pieces,  joined 
to  the  f'heeks,  and  serving  to  connect  tlie  two  parts  of 
the  carriage  togeth(M\  It  is  used  in  directing  the 
piece,  etc.* 

Tlie  trail  is  the  curved  part  of  the  stock,  Avhich  rests 
on  the  ground  when  the  piece  is  in  battery. 

The  trunnion  plates  are  fastened  on  the  cheeks  to 
receive  the  trunnions. 

The  cap  squares  are  pieces  of  iron  placed  over  the 
ti'unnions  to  keep  them  in  their  plates.  They  are  fas- 
tened b}'  chains,  pins,  and  kej's. 

The  elevating  screw  serves  to  raise  or  lower  the 
breech.     It  has  a  handle  with  four  prongs. 

The  lock  chain  is  placed  on  the  side  of  the  carriage. 
It  serves  to  keep  the  wheel  from  turning. 

The  trail  handles  are  placed  on  each  side  of  the  stock, 
and  serve  to  raise  it. 

The  trail  plate  is  a  piece  of  iron  fastened  at  the  trail, 
having  a  ver}^  stout  ring,  called  the  trail  lunettCj  which 
receives  the  pintle  hook. 

The  jwinting  rings  (large  or  small)  are  on  the  trail; 
the  large  one  turns.     They  receive  the  handspike. 

The  prolonge  hooks  are  placed  on  the  upper  part  of 
tiie  stock.  They  serve  to  secure  the  prolonge  when 
coiled. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TIErE.  18 

lamA^'lUJilLy^L  .        The  Limber. 

The  limber  is  tlie  forward  part  of  the  carriage,  and 
I'lins  upon  the  two  fore  wheels. 

The  axle  body  is  the  wooden  part  in  which  the  iron 
axle-tree  is  placed. 

The  hounds  are  pieces  of  wood  connecting  the  body 
of  the  axle  to  the  splinter  bar,  and  upon  which  the 
ammunition  chest  rests. 

The  fork  is  a  piece  of  wood  between  the  hounds,  and 
ibrms  an  opening  in  which  the  pole  is  placed. 

The  splinter  bar  serves  for  hitching  the  wheel-horses, 
and  has  for  this  purpose  four  trace  hooks.  It  is  fastened 
on  the  hounds  and  fork. 

The  pole  straps  guide  the  pole.  They  are  attached 
to  the  harness  of  the  wheel-horses,  })assiiig  through 
slirling  loops  0]\  the  breast  straps. 

The  branches  of  the  pole  yoke  are  attached  by  means 
of  sliding  rings  to  the  collars  of  the  Avhcel-horseS;  and 
support  the  pole. 

The  pintle  hook,  on  the  hind  part  of  the  limber  axle- 
tree,  serves  to  unite  the  limber  to  the  carriage,  and 
has  a  key. 

The  ammunition  chest  serves  to  transport  ammuni- 
tion, and  is  placed  on  the  limber. 

The  Caisson. 

It  consists  of  a  frame,  mounted  on  v/heels,  for  the 
transportation  of  two  ammunition  chests,  a  spare 
wheel,  and  other  spare  parts,  tools,  etc.  Its  limber  is 
similar  to  that  of  the  piece.  In  case  of  necessity,  can- 
noneers may  be  trans2)orted  on  the  ci>ests. 

The  5foc/i;  has  an  iron  lunette  on  the  front  end;  at 
the  rear  end  it  is  let  in  four  inches  for  its  whole  width 
into  the  front  of  the  axle  body. 


14  8CH00L    OF    THE    PIECE. 

The  axle  body  is  notched  to  receive  the  middle  mil, 
and  has  tenons  to  fit  into  notches  in  the  side  rails. 

The  middle  and  two  side  rails,  and  one  cross  bar 
complete  the  wooden  parts  of  the  frame. 

The  middle  assembling  bar  (iron)  has  two  ears  in  the 
middle,  to  serve  as  stay  plates  for  the  ammunition 
chests,  and  a  slat  for  the  axe-blade  on  the  right  of  the 
middle  rail. 

The  rear  assembling  bar  supports  the  spare  wheel 
axle.  It  has  a  slat  on  the  left  of  the  middle  rail  for 
carrying  a  pickaxe. 

The  sjyare  wheel  axle  consists  of  a  body  and  two  ribs; 
it  has  a  chain  and  toggle  to  secure  the  wheel.  There 
are  two  stays  for  the  axle;  the  bolt  hole  in  the  head  of 
one  of  them  is  square,  in  the  other  round. 

The  carriage  hook  is  intended  to  take  a  carriage 
which  may  have  lost  its  limber. 

The  bolster  for  the  front  foot-board  is  fastened  on 
the  middle  of  the  cross  bar.  The  front  foot-board  is 
fastened  to  the  rails  and  cross  bar;  the  rear  foot-board 
to  the  rails  only. 

The  key  ^late  for  spare  pole  is  fastened  on  the  under 
side  of  the  lunette.  The  key  is  attached  to  the  left 
side  of  the  stock  by  a  chain  and  eye  pin,  screwed  into 
the  left  side  of  the  stock.  The  spare  pole  ring  is  held 
by  the  axle  strap. 

The  spare  handspike  ring,  key  plate,  and  key  are  on 
the  right  side  of  the  middle  rail. 

One  key  pAate  and  key,  for  the  shovel  handle,  are 
fastened  on  the  inside  of  the  right  side  rail 

The  lock  chaiii  bridle  is  fastened  under  the  front  end 
of  the  left  side  rail ;  it  holds  the  large  ring  of  the  lock 
chain. 

Besides    these    carriages,   a    travelling  forge,    with 


SCHOOL  or  the  piece,  J  5 

Biiiilhs'  iiiul  arnioror.s'  tools  and  stores,  for  shoeing 
and  ordinary  repairs,  and  a  battery  wagon  for  stores, 
material,  and  the  tools  of  the  carriage-maker,  wlicel- 
wright,  saddler,  and  harness-maker,  form  parts  of  the 
batter}'. 

The  battery  of  wanwuvre  consists  of  the  pieces  i^e- 
longing  to  the  field  battery,  with  an  equal  number  of 
caissons,  all  properly  equipped,  horsed,  and  manned. 
Each  caisson  is  permanently  attached  to  a  piece,  and 
manoeuvres  with  it. 

On  the  war  establishment,  or  when  ordered  to 
march,  each  carriage  of  the  G-pounder  and  light  12- 
pounder  batteries  is  drawn  by  six  horses.  On  the 
peace  establishment,  in  garrison,  four  horses  onl}-  ure 
required.  When  12-pounder  batteries  are  in  the  field 
or  on  the  road,  each  piece  and  caisson  of  the  battery 
of  manoeuvre  requires  eight  horses,  the  other  car- 
riages six  horses  each. 

The  Gun  DetachiMent. 

The  cannoneers  of  a  piece  when  united  for  the  ser- 
vice of  the  gun,  or  for  the  preliminary  instruction, 
constitute  a  detachment,  which  is  comjjosed  ordinarily 
of  eight  men,  commanded  by  the  gunner. 

A  rank  is  composed  of  men  tibreast;  a  file  of  men 
placed  one  behind  the  other. 

The  cannoneers  fall  in  in  two  ranks,  eujhteen  inches 
betw^cen  the  ranks;  elbows  slightly  touching;  and  in 
such  manner  that  they  may  be  told  olf  to  the  duties 
at  the  piece  for  which  they  are  best  fitted.  This  of 
course  does  not  apply  to  recruits,  each  of  wliom  must 
be  taught  the  duties  of  every  number  under  all  cir- 
cumstances. 

The  gunner  tells  the  detachment  off  from  the  right, 


16  SCHOOL    OF    THE    PJECE. 

No.  1  being  on  the  right  of  the  rear  rank,  No.  2  on 
the  right  of  the  front  rank,  No.  3  on  the  left  of  No.  1, 
No.  4  on  the  left  of  No.  2,  and  so  on — the  even  num- 
bers being  in  the  front  and  the  odd  numbers  in  the 
rear  rank.  He  then  takes  post  on  the  right  of  the 
front  rank.  The  chief  of  caisson,  who,  as  well  as  the 
gunner,  should  be  a  corporal,  is  told  oif  as  No.  8  of  the 
gun  detachment.  When  the  detachment  is  composed 
of  more  or  less  than  eight  men,  he  should  be  the 
highest  even  number. 

When  the  chief  of  the  piece  is  present,  and  not  the 
instructor,  he  performs  the  duties  and  takes  the  posi- 
tion of  the  gunner,  who  then  takes  post  one  yard  in 
rear  of  the  right  file  and  acts  as  file-closer,  except 
when  the  chief  of  piece  is  out  of  ranks,  when  the  gun- 
ner resumes  his  post. 


Article  II. 

METHOD  OF  INSTRUCTION. 

The  object  of  this  school  is  the  regular  and  progres- 
sive instruction  of  the  artilleryman  in  his  duties  at 
and  connected  with  the  piece,  from  the  period  of  his 
joining  as  a  recruit. 

This  instruction  is  given  by  the  non-coinmissioned 
ofiicers,  under  the  supervision  of  the  chiefs  of  sections. 

The  instructor  should  never  require  a  movement  to 
be  perlbrmod  until  it  is  exactly  explaincel  and  exe- 
cuted by  himself.  It  should  be  left  to  the  recruit  to 
take  tlu-!  positions  and  execute  the  movements  di- 
rected, and  he  should  be  touched  only  to  rectify  mis- 
takes arising  from  want  of  intelligence. 

Each   movement   should    be    perfectly   understood 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    PIECE.  17 

before  passing  to  another.  After  tliey  have  been 
properl}^  executed  in  the  order  laid  down,  the  in- 
structor no  longer  confines  himself  to  that  order. 

The  instructor  allows  the  men  to  rest  at  intervals 
during  drill,  and  for  this  purpose  he  commands  Rest. 
At  this  command  the  recruit  is  no  longer  required  to 
preserve  immobilit3^  At  the  command  Attention,  the 
man  takes  his  position,  and  remains  motionless. 

Great  patience  and  the  utmost  precision  are  neces- 
sary on  the  part  of  the  instructor.  He  should  espe- 
cially endeavor  to  excite  a  spirited  and  active  deport- 
ment at  every  military  exercise;  and,  above  all,  not  to 
disgust  the  men  by  too  long  an  application  to  any  one 
point  in  the  drill. 


Article  III. 

PRELIMINARY  INSTRUCTION. 

The  preliminary  instruction  to  be  given  to  artillery 
recruits  is  the  same  as  that  given  to  the  infantry  sol- 
dier, previous  to  his  instruction  in  the  manual  of  arms, 
embracing  the  position  of  the  soldier,  the  facings,  and 
marching — all  of  wiiich  being  fully  described  in  the 
first  part  of  instruction  in  infantry  tactics  need  not 
be  repeated  here,  as  reference  may  be  made  to  that 
book.  Besides  this,  artillery  recruits  are  early  in- 
structed in  the  sabre  exercise,  the  details  of  wdiich  are 
fully  explained  and  illustrated  i-n  the  compiler's  cav- 
alry drill,  to  which  work  the  learner  is  referred. 

In  addition  to  the  foregoing,  the  light  artillery 
soldier  should  be  taught  how  to  mount  a  horse,  and 
practised  at  riding,  in  order  that  he  may  be  fitted  for 
duties  of  driver,  and  any  other  position  requiring  a 


18  SCHOOL   OF    THE    PIECE. 

knowledge  Of  horsemauship.  He  should,  moreover, 
be  instructed  in  the  care  of  horses,  and  in  the  manner 
of  harnessing  and  hitching  them. 

All  of  these  acquirements  arc  indispensable  to  the 
thorough  instruction  of  the  artilleryman,  though  in- 
struction in  the  scliools  of  the  piece  and  battery  need 
]iot  be  delayed  to  accomplish  them. 


AUTlCliE    IV. 

MANUxVL  OF  THE  PIECE. 

For  the  purpose  of  instruction,  each  detachment  is 
to  be  formed  in  front  of  tlie  piece,  unlimbered,  and 
the  different  numbers  are  to  be  called  upon,  succes- 
sively, to  perform  their  respective  duties  ?'?i  detail, 
while  the  rest  of  the  detachment  look  on  and  observe 
their  motions.  When  it  is  found  difficult  to  make  the 
recruit  sensible  of  the  defect  in  his  position,  the  in- 
structor will  place  himself  or  another  recruit  in  the 
correct  position. 

Nine  men,  including  the  gunner,  are  necessary  for 
the  service  of  a  field  piece.  When  from  necessity  the 
detachment  consists  of  less  than  nine,  the  higher  nara- 
bcrs  are  struck  out  and  additional  duties  are  imposed 
upon  those  remaining. 

Posts  of  tile  CannOxXeers.     Piece  UNLi^niRED. 

Figure  4.  The  gunner  is  at  the  end  of  the  trail 
handspike;  Nos.  1  and  2  are  about  two  feet  outside 
the  wheels,  No.  1  on  the  right,  and  No.  2  on  tlie 
left ',  with  howitzers,  rather  in  rear  of  the  muzzle;  with 
g-uhs,  in  line  with   the  front  part  of  the  wheels;  Nos. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    PIECE.  19 

3  and  4  are  in  line  with  the  knob  of  the.cascabel,  cov- 
ering Nos.  1  and  2;  IS'o.  5  is  flue  yards  in  reav  of  the 
left  wheel;  No.  6  in  rear  of  the  limber,  and  No.  7  on 
his  left,  covering  No.  5 ;  JS'  o.  8,  the  chief  of  the  caisson, 
is  /o?//*  3'ards  in  rear  of  the  limber,  and  on  its  left; 
all  face  to  the  front. 

The  chief  of  the  piece  is  opposite  the  middle  of  the 
trail  handspike,  outside  and  near  the  left  cannoneers. 
In  actual  firing  he  takes  his  place  on  the  right  or  left, 
where  he  Ciin  best  observe  the  effect  of  the  shot. 

Loading  and  Firino. 

The  piece  is  taken  to  the  drill  ground,  unlimbered, 
and  prepared  for  action  ;  the  limber  in  position  behind 
the  piece,  and  facing  toward  it;  the  end  of  the  pole 
six  yards  from  the  end  of  the  trail  handspike. 

For  the  instruction  of  recruits  united  for  the  service 
of  the  gun,  the  exercise  is  conducted  by  detail,  the 
instructor  giving  all  the  commands.  His  commands 
are,  Load  by  detail — Load;  fico,  three,  four ;  Sponge; 
two,  three,  four ;  IIaiu  ;  two,  three ;  JIkady  ;  Fire  ;  Cease 

FIHING. 

When  the  men  are  sufficientlj''  instructed  to  go 
through  the  manual  Avithout  detail,  the  commands  of 
the  instructor  for  that  purpose  are.  Load  ;  Commence 
firing ;  Cease  firing;  or  simply,  Commence  firing ;  and 
Cease  firing.  After  the  command  Commence  firing  the 
action  is  continued  as  laid  down  for  loading  without 
detail,  until  the  command  Cease  firing  is  given,  which 
is  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  piece  and  the  gunner. 

Duties  of  the  Gunner. 
The  p'unner  tcives  all  executive  commands  in  action. 
TFe  is  answerable  that  all  the  numbers  perform  their 


20  SCHOOL    OF    THE   TIECE. 

duties  correctly.  He  communicates  the  orders  which 
lie  receives  for  the  kind  of  ammunition  to  be  fired; 
sending  to  No.  6  the  time  or  distance  for  each  round, 
when  firing  shells  or  spherical  case  shot.  He  should, 
when  the  firing  is  slow,  see  that  each  fuse  is  properly 
prepared,  and  make  such  corrections  as  are  necessary ; 
for  this  purpose  he,  as  well  as  No.  6,  should  be  pro- 
vided Avith  a  fuse  irouo-e. 

On  receiving  the  command  or  signal  to  commence 
firing,  he  gives  the  command  Load;  takes  hold  of  the 
handspike  at  the  end  with  his  right  hand,  and  at  the 
centre  with  his  left;  places  his  knee  against  the  left 
hand,  bending  over  it,  the  right  knee  being  slightl}^ 
bent;  looks  over  the  top  of  the  piece,  and  gives  the 
direction.  He  then  steps  to  the  breech  to  give  the 
elevation,  which  he  does  b}^  placing  the  hausse  on  its 
seat,  taking  ho|d  of  a  handle  of  the  elevating  screw, 
drawing  back  his  right  foot,  bending  over  his  left 
knee,  and  sighting  through  the  slit  in  the  hausse. 
(This  position  is  shown  in  figure  5.) 

When  the  piece  is  loaded  and  pointed,  he  removes 
the  hausse,  gives  the  command  Eeady,  and,  stepping 
clear  of  the  wheel  to  that  side  where  he  can  best  ob- 
serve the  effect  of  his  shot,  gives  the  command  Fire. 
As  soon  as  the  piece  has  been  fired,  he  causes  it  to  be 
run  up  to  its  former  place,  if  necessary. 

When  the  instructor,  instead  of  divine:  the  command 
Commence  firing,  gives  that  of  Load,  the  gunner 
repeats  it,  and  performs  the  same  duties  as  before, 
except  that  he  does  not  command  Fire  until  the 
firing  is  ordered  to  commence.  After  the  command 
Commence  firing  is  given,  the  action  is  continued  bj- 
the  gunner,  without  further  commands  from  the  in- 
Btrnctor^  until  the  firing  is  ordercr]  to  cease.     When 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    PIECE.  21 

the  commands  are  all  given  by  the  instructor,  as  in 
loading  by  detail,  the  gunner  performs  the  same  duties, 
but  without  repeating  the  commands. 

Duties  of  No.  1. 

Figure  4.  Until  the  command  Load,  No.  1  stands 
square  to  tlie  front,  in  line  with  the  front  part  of  the 
wheels,  holding  tlic  sponge  about  the  middle  of  the 
staff  in  his  right  hand,  and  trailing  it  at  an  angle  of 
45°,  sponge  head  up.     The  instructor  commands: 

By  detail — TjOAD. 

Three  times  and  four  motions. 

Figure  6.  At  this  command  No.  1  faces  to  the 
left,  steps  obliquely  to  the  right  with  his  right  foot, 
Avithout  moving  his  left,  and  at  the  same  time  brings* 
the  sponge  smartly  to  a  perpendicular  position  by 
drawing  his  right  hand  up  in  line  witli  the  elbow. 
The  sponge  is  grasped  firmly  in  the  hand,  and  the 
rammer  head  kept  just  over  the  riglit  toe,  the  elbow 
close  to  tiie  side. 

Two. 

Figure  7.  He  steps  obliquely  to  the  left  with  his 
left  foot,  planting  it  about  half-way  between  the  piece 
and  the  wheel,  and  opposite  the  muzzle;  bringing  the 
sponge  at  the  same  time  across  his  body  to  the  left, 
so  that  his  right  hand  may  be  opposite  the  middle  of 
the  body,  the  sponge  staff  being  inclined  at  an  angle 
of  45°  across  the  front  of  it. 

Three. 

Figure  8.  lie  takes  a  side  step  to  the  right  of 
thirty  inches,  and,  bending  his  knee,  brings  the  sponge 


22  SCHOOL    OF    THE    PIECE. 

to  a  horizontal  position,  extending  the  hands  to  the 
ends  of  the  staff,  the  sponge  head  to  the  left,  the  back 
of  his  right  hand  up,  and  that  of  his  left  down,  the 
sponge  head  against  the  face  of  the  piece.' 

Four. 

Figure  9.  He  inserts  the  sponge  head,  drops  his 
left  hand  behind  his  thigh,  shoulders  square,  feet 
equally  turned  out,  straightens  the  right  knee,  and, 
bending  over  the  left,  forces  the  sponge  home. 

Sponge. 

Three  iimes  and  four  motions. 

Figure  5.  At  this  command  No.  1  fixes  his  eye  on 
the  vent  to  see  that  it  is  closed,  gives  two  turns  to  the 
sponge,  taking  great  care  to  press  it  at  the  same  time 
against  the  bottom  of  the  bore. 

Two. 

Figure  10.  He  draws  out  the  sponge,  at  the  same 
time  straightening  his  left  knee,  and  bending,  his 
right  J  seizes  the  staff  near  the  sponge  head  with  his 
left  hand,  back  of  the  hand  down,  and  places  the 
sponge  against  the  face  of  the  piece. 

Three. 

Figure  11.  He  turns  the  sponge  by  bringing  his 
hands  together  in  the  middle  of  the  staff,  giving  it  a 
cant  with  each  hand,  throwing  the  sponge  head  over, 
at  the  same  time  turning  his  wrist,  which  brings  the 
staff  horizontal,  and  extending  his  hands  to  the  ends 
of  the  staff,  baclv  of  the  left  up,  that  of  the  other 
down. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    PIECE. 


23 


Four. 

Figure  12.  H~  introduces  the  rummer  bead  into 
the  muzzle  as  soon  as  No.  2  has  inserted  the  charge, 
and  joins  his  left  hand  to  his  right,  casting  his  ej^c  to 
the  front. 

During  the  whole  time  of  sponging  No.  1  keeps  his 
eye  on  the  vent.  If  at  any  time  it  is  not  closed,  he 
will   discontinue   the   mananivre,  and  comnian<l   Stop 

VENT.. 

7'ivo  limes  and  three  mol'wn.^. 

FicuJKE  lo.  At  this  command  No.  1  rams  home, 
throwing  the  weight  of  Ins  body  with  the  rammer; 
bending  over  his  left  knee,  and  passing  his  left  arm, 
Avith  the  elbow  slightly  bent,  and  back  of  the  hand 
up,  in  a  horizontal  position  over  the  piece,  until  it 
points  in  the  direction  of  the  left  trunnion;  the  right 
shoulder  back,  and  the  eyes  cast  toward  the  front 
until  the  cartridge  is  home. 

Two. 

Figure  14.  lie  jerks  the  sponge  out  with  his  right 
hand,  allowing  it  to  slide  through  the  hand  as  far  as 
the  middle  of  the  staff,  when  he  grasps  it  tirmly,  and 
seizing  it  close  to  the  rammer  head  with  the  left  hand, 
back  of  the  hand  up,  places  the  rammer  head  against 
the  face  of  the  piece;  both  knees  straight;  eyes  to 
his  own  front. 

Three. 

Figure  15.  He  then  draws  the  sponge  close  to  his 
body,  and  immediately  steps  back  outside  the  wheel, 
first  with  the  right,  then  with  the  left  foot,  so  that 
when  the  ri<-'ht  foot  is  brought  to  it  the  right  hip  n;ia3' 


24  SCHOOL    OF    THE    PIECE. 

be  on  a  line  with  the  front  of  the  wheel.  In  drawing 
the  right  foot  to  the  left  he  gives  the  sponge  a  cant 
with  his  left  hand,  at  the  same  time  quitting  it,  and 
brings  the  sponge  to  a  perpendicular  position  in  the 
right  hand,  the  rammer  head  resting  on  the  right  toe. 

Eeady. 

Figure  16.  At  this  command,  which  is  given  as 
soon  as  the  piece  is  loaded,  or  the  firing  is  about  to 
commence,  No.  1  breaks  well  off  to  his  left  with  his 
left  foot,  bending  the  left  knee  and  straiglitening  the 
right  leg,  drops  the  end  of  the  sponge  staff  into  the 
left  hand,  back  of  the  left  down,  and  fixes  his  eyes  on 
the  muzzle. 

The  heels  should  be  parallel  to  the  wdieels,  the  body- 
erect  on  the  haunches,  and  the  sponge  and  hammer 
held  in  both  hands  in  a  horizontal  position,  sponge 
head  to  the  left. 

The  piece  liaving  been  fired.  No  1  rises  on  his  right 
knee,  and  returns  to  his  position,  as  in  the  third  mo- 
tion of  Eam. 

At  the  command  Load,  he  steps  in  and  performs  his 
duties  in  the  same  manner  as  before. 

When  the  loading  is  not  by  detail^  No.  1  goes  through 
all  his  duties  at  the  command  Load,  returns  to  his 
position  outside  the  wheel,  as  given  in  the  third  mo- 
tion of  Ram;  breaks  off  at  the  command  Ready,  and 
at  the  flash  of  the  gun  rises,  steps  in,  and  performs 
his  duties  in  the  same  manner  as  before.  This  he 
continues  nntil  the  command  Cease  firing  is  given, 
at  wdiich  command  he  resumes  the  position  :  To  your 
posts.  If  tlic  sponging  has  been  commenced  when 
the  command  Cease  firing  is  given,  it  is  completed 
before  No.  1  resumes  his  post. 


SCHOOL  OF  tup:  i'jece,  25 

111  sponging  iviid  rainiiiing,  if  llic  length  of  tlic  ])iocc 
requires  it,  tiic  sponge  and  rammer  are  to  be  pressed 
liome  in  two  molions,  Ko.  1  extending  his  right  hand 
to  the  end  of  tiic  staff  as  soon  as  it  reaches  the  muz- 
zle. 

In  sponging  howif-rrs,  No.  1  presses  the  s})onge  to 
tiic  bottom  of  the  cliambcr,  which  should  be  well 
sponged  out.  He  wipes  the  bore  by  rubbing  its  whole 
surface,  wilhotit  allowing  the  sponge  to  turn  in  his 
hands. 

In  the  ibrcgoing  motions  tlie  position  of  the  left 
foot  WMJI  not  be  considered  as  absolute;  it  is  given  as 
tiic  usual  one,  and  may  be  modified  according  to  the 
calibre  of  the  piece  and  iieight  of  the  man.  The  same 
remarks  wmH  applj^  to  the  distance  between  the  feet. 
They  will  be  placed  in  such  position  and  at  such  dis- 
tance from  each  other  as  will  enable  the  man  to  per- 
form his  duties  wnth  the  most  ease  and  steadiness, 
and  at  the  same  time  exert  his  full  strength,  which 
will  always  be  required  after  firing  a  few  rounds, 
especially  when  a  new  sponge  is  used. 

One  object  of  joining  the  left  hand  to  the  right  and 
casting  the  eyes  to  the  front  while. ramming,  is  to 
refuse  the  right  shoulder;  and  to  secure  this  object, 
the  left  hand,  when  it  passes  over  the  piece,  is  not 
.carried  further  back  than  the  direction  indicated. 
This  will  keep  the  shoulders  in  a  line  parallel  with 
their  position  at  the  commencement  of  the  movement 
until  the  cartridge  is  set  home,  and  thus  guard  against 
latal  results  in  case  of  a  premature  discharge. 

Duties  of  No.  2. 
Until  the  command  Load  is  given^  JSTo.  2  remainu  in 
his  position,  sho^vn  in  figure  4. 
3 


26  SCHOOL  or  tiik  pij:ck. 

On  this  comjiiand  being  given,  lie.  faecs  to  his  right, 
mid  by  two  oblique  steps,  corresponding  to  those  of 
No.  1,  the  first  with  the  left,  tlic  second  at  the  com- 
mand Two,  with  the  right  foot,  he  places  himself  near 
the  muzzle  of  the  piece.  At  the  command  Three,  he 
brings  up  his  left  foot  to  the  side  of  the  riglit,  and 
faces  to  his  right,  bringing  up  his  hands  together  to 
receive  the  ammunition  from  No.  5 — the  cartridge  in 
the  right,  the  shot  in  the  left  hand.     Figure  17. 

As  soon  as  the  sponge  is  withdrawn  he  faces  to  his 
left,  and  puts  the  ammunition  into  the  muzzle,  taking 
care  that  the  seam  of  the  cartridge  does  not  come 
under  tlie  vent,  and  then  steps  back,  commencing 
with' bis  left  foot,  -to  his  position  outside  the  wheel,  in 
the  same  manner  as  No.  1  does. 

At  the  command  Ready,  he  breaks  well  oil'  to  his 
right  with  his  right  foot,  bending  the  right  knee  and 
straightening  the  left  leg;  the  body  erect  on  the 
haunches,  and  fixes  his  eyes  on  the  muzzle. 

The  piece  having  been  fired,  No.  2  rises  on  his  left 
leg,  remains  facing  the  piece  until  he  hears  the  com- 
mand Load,  or  observes  the  flash  of  the  gun,  then 
steps  in,  and  performs  bis  duty  as  before.  At  the 
command  Cease  firing,  he  then  takes  his  position 
outside  the  wheel,  and  faces  to  the  front. 

Duties  of  No.  3. 

Nd.  3  stands  in  line  with  the  knob  of  the  cascabel, 
covering  No.  1,  the  priming-wire  in  his  right  hand, 
thumb  through  the  ring,  the  tlmmbstall  on  the  left 
thumb,  the  tube-pouch  fastened  to  the  waist.     Fig.  4. 

At  the  command  Load,  he  stei)s  to  his  left,  Avipes 
the  vent-field  with  the  thumbstall,  w^hich  he  then 
holds  pressed  upon  the  vent,  keeping  hie  elbow  raised; 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    PIECE.  27 

liis  lingers  on  tlio  left  .side  of  the  piece,  so  as  to  allow 
the  gunner  to  point  over  his  thumb;  the  right  hand 
on  the  tube-poucJi.     Figure  5. 

When  the  piece  is  sponged  and  the  charge  inserted 
by  No.  2,  he  jumps  to  tlie  end  of  the  trail  handspike, 
and,  seizing  it  with  both  hands,  prepares  to  move  it 
to  tlie  right  or  left  on  a  signal  from  the  gunner,  who 
taps  the  right  of  the  trail  for  a  movement  to  the  left, 
and  the  left  of  trail  for  a  movement  to  the  right.  As 
soon  as  the  piece  is  pointed,  the  gunner  raises  both 
hands  as  a  signal  to  No.  3,  who  then  resumes  the  posi- 
tion To  your  post. 

At  the  command  Eeady,  he  steps  to  the  piece, 
pricks  the  cartridge,  taking  care  not  to  move  the 
charge,  and  covers  the  vent  with  his  left  hand  as  soon 
as  the  tube  is  inserted.  At  the  command  Fire,  he 
steps  to  his  right,  clear  of  the  wheel,  and  at  the  flash 
of  the  gun,  or  at  the  command  Load,  serves  vent  as 
before. 

No. ;]  should  be  careful  to  keep  the  vent  closed  from 
the  time  the  sponge  enters  the  muzzle  until  the  charge 
is  inserted  by  No.  2. 

Duties  or  No.  4. 

The  post  of  No.  -1  is  on  a  line  with  the  knob  of  the 
cascabel,  and  covering  No.  2. 

At  the  command  Loai^,  No.  4  inserts  the  lanyard 
into  the  ring  of  a  primer,  and  stands  in  his  position. 

At  the  command  Heady,  he  stops  in  with  his  right 
foot,  drops  the  tube  in  the  vent,  takes  the  lanyard  in 
his  right  hand,  moves  to  the  rear  so  far  as  to  keep  the 
lanyard  slack,  but  capable  of  being  stretched,  without 
altering  his  position,  which  should  bo  clear  of  tho 
wheel,  left  foot  broken  to  the  left  and  rear.     Fig.  18. 


At  the  comiiiRnd  FjjiE;  as  soon  us  Ko.  ?>  i;-^  clcai'  of 
ihc  wheel  Ko.  4  pulls  the  hinyjird  b.v*i«kly  aiid  fivnily, 
j)assing  the  hand,  back  up,  in  a  downward  direction 
to  the  rear,  so  as  to  keep  the  lanyard  hook  fV(.)iii  fiyinf^- 
back  in  the  direction  of  the  face.  Should  Ihc  tube 
fail  to  explode  the  charge,  the  gunner  immediately 
commands,  Boiit*  advance,  the  primer  has  failed.  Upon 
which  Iso.  2  steps  inside  the  wheel,  close  to  tlie  axle- 
tree,  receives  from  No.  o  over  the  wheel  a  priming- 
wire,  and  from  No.  4  a  prepared  primer;  pricks, 
primes,  and  resumes  his  post.  At  the  command 
Cease  riiiiNG,  No.  4  secures  his  lanyard. 

No.  3,  as  well  as  No.  4,  should  be  equipped  with  a 
tube-pouch,  furnished  with  friction -primers  and  lan- 
yards. In  the  absence  of  No.  4,  immediately  alter 
pricking  the  cartridge,  he  prepares  and  inserts  a  tube, 
steps  to  his  post,  faces  the  vent,  breaks  to  his  rear 
with  the  left  foot,  and,  at  the  command  Fire,  dis- 
ciiarges  the  piece.  Ko  then  resumes  his  post,  and 
tends  the  vent  as  before. 


Duties  of  No.  5. 

« 

The  position  of  No.  5  is  five  yards  clear  of,  "and  cov- 
ering the  left  wheel. 

At  the  command  Load,  No.  5  runs  to  the  ammuni- 
tion chest,  receives  from  No.^7  or  No.  G  a  single  round, 
the  shot  in  the  right  hand,  the  cartridge  in  his  left; 
takes  it  to  the  piece  and  delivers  it  to  No.  2  (figure 
19),  returns  immediately  for  another  round,  and  then 
halts  at  his  post  until  the  piece  is  fired.  In  firing 
shells  or  spherical  case,  he  exhibits  the  fuse  to  the 
gunner  before  delivering  the  charge  to  No.  2. 


SCHOOL  OF  Tii-R  riECF;.  29 

DUTIKS   OF   No.    G. 

No.  G  18  ^iatioiuxl  in  tlic  ivtir  of  tlio  limber  chest, 
and  issues  tlie  aiiiiniiiiition.  [fe  ih  pvovldod  with  ii 
fuse  i;'oiio-e,  aiul  proj)ai*e.s  tlie  shell  and  spherical  case 
sliot  accoi'dino-  to  the  dlst.'inee  or  time  ordered,  before 
deliv^M-iiiL;;  it  to  No.  o. 

Duties  of  No.  T. 

The  .station  of  No.  7  is  in  rear  of  and  near  the  left 
limber  wheel.  It  is  his  duty  to  assist  No.  G  in  prep- 
aration of  ammunition,  and  serviiio-  of  it  to  No.  f). 
In  raj)id  tiring,  with  round  shot  and  canister,  Nos.  5 
and  7  maj'  alternate  in  delivering  the  charges  to  No. 
2.  cspeciallj^  when  ammunition  is  issued  direct  from 
the  caisson. 

When  the  ammunition  pouches  arc  used  they  arc 
worn  by  Nos.  5  and  7,  hung  from  the  left  shoulder  to 
the  right  side;  the  j-ound  is  placed  in  the  pouch  b^^ 
No.  G  or  No.  1,  so  that  the  cartridge  will  be  to  the 
front.  When  it  is  brought  \i\)  No.  5  holds  open  the 
pouch,  and  No.  2  takes  out  the  round  with  both  hands. 
At  the  command  Cease  firing,  No.  5  carries  the  round 
back  to  No.  G. 

No.  G  will  be  careful  not  to  raise  the  lid  unneccssa- 
I'ily.  It  should  be  kept  closed  when  possible.  In 
tiring  shells  and  spherical  case,  ho  prepares  each  fuse 
as  dii'eeted,  assisted  wdien  necessaiy  by  No.  7,  Ho 
gives  No.  5  the  time  or  distance  of  the  fuse  Avith  each 
round  issued,  who  reports  to  the  gunner  before  deliv- 
ering it  to  No.  2.  At  the  command  Ceask  firing,  ho 
carefull}'-  replaces  the  amnmnition  in  the  chest  and 
secures  the  lid. 


30  SCHOOL    OF    TUT.    PIECF. 

To  Cut  the  Fuse. 

Place  the  projectile  between  the  knees,  fuse  upper- 
most, and  sujiport  it  with  the  left  hand.  Holding  tlie 
fuse  gouge  in  the  right  hand,  place  the  left  corner  of 
its  edge  close  to  and  on  the  right  of  the  graduated 
mark  indicating  the  time  desired,  and  cut  away  grad- 
ually until  the  composition  is  exposed  for  a  length 
about  equal  to  the  widtli  of  the  gouge.  (Ji'oat  care 
must  be  taken  not  to  expose  the  coni])osition  to  the 
left  of  the  proper  graduation  mark,  and  to  this  end 
particularly  avoid  cominencing  to  cut.  too  close  to  the 
desired  mark;  for  after  the  composition  is  once  ex- 
posed it  is  ver}'  easy  to  pare  away  to  the  left.,  if  tiie 
time  has  not  been  accurately  cut.  AVlien  time  per- 
mits, it  is  well  to  expose  the  coni])08ition  fully,  either 
by  cutting  the  opening  larger  toward  the  rigid  or  (with 
shells  only)  by  cutting  another  opening  to  the  right 
of  the  first.  It  is  in  all  cases  bettei'  to  enlarge  the 
first  opening,  and  always  by  extending  it  toward  the 
right. 

Care  must  be  taken  not  to  cut  the  fiise  more  ra})idly 
than  the  demand  for  shells  and  shrapnel  shot  requires. 

Moving  the  Piece  by  Hand.     Piece  Unlimuered. 
To  the  front.     The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  By  hand  to  the  front.     2.  March,     vl.  HAi/r. 

At  the  first  command  the  gunner  seizes  the  end  of 
the  handspike,  and  Nos.  1,  2,  8,  and  4  the  spokes  of 
the  wheels;  No.  1  with  his  left  hand,  Nos.  2,  o,  and  4 
with  both  hands;  No.  1  holds  the  sponge  with  his 
right  hand,  the  stall"  resting  on  his  right  shoulder,  the 
head  down.  Figure  20.  At  the  second  connnand  they 
move  the  piece  foi'wai'd_,  tlio  gunner  i-aising  (he   tri^il 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    PIECE.  81 

until   tlie  cotnniand  Halt   is  given;  when  all  resume 
their  posts. 

By  H.vnd  TO  THE  Rear. 

To  the  rear.     The  insLriietor  commands: 

1.  Ihi  hand  to  the  rear.     2.  March.     3.  Halt. 

At  the  first  command  the  gunner,  facing  to  the  rear, 
seizes  the  handspike  with  his  right  hand;  Nos.  1,  2, 
3,  and  4  seize  the  wlieels  as  before,  except  that  No.  1, 
holding  the  sponge  in  the  left  hand,  uses  his  right  at 
tlie  wheel.  At  the  r-ommand  March,  they  move  the 
piece  to  llic  rear,  the  gunner  raising  the  trail,  until 
the  commaiul    Malt   is  given,  when   all  i-esume  their 

posts. 

OiiAXGiNG  Posts. 

In  order  to  insti'uct  the  men  in  all  the  duties  at  the 
piece,  the  instructor  causes  them  to  change  posts. 
For  this  purpose  he  commands: 

1.  Change  posts.  2.  March. 
^At  the  command  Change  posts,  the  men  on  the  right 
of  the  piece  face  to  the  rear;  those  who  have  ecpiip- 
ments  la^^  them  down,  No.  1  resting  the  sponge  head 
on  the  nave  of  the  wheel.  At  the  command  March, 
each  man  takes  the  place  and  equipments  of  the  man 
in  his  front. 

No.  1  takes  the  place  of  No.  3. 

No.  3     ^'  ^'  ^<^-  ^• 

No.  8     "  "  N^-  ^' 

No.  0     '^  "  N^-  7. 

No.  7     '•  ''  No.  5. 

No   0     ''  "  -^o.  4. 

No.  !     '•  *'  N«^-  -• 


No. 


No.  1. 


32  SCHOOL    OF    THE    PIECE. 

The  gunner  changes  with  one  of  the  nninbers  by 
special  direction  of  the  instructor.  A  sufficient  num- 
ber of  the  moat  intelligent  cannoneers  must  be  kept 
instructed  to  serve  as  gunners. 

The  gunner,  who  is  responsible  for  the  equipments, 
either  distributes  tliem  from  the  limber-chest,  or  they 
may  be  hung  on  the  neck  of  the  cascabel,  and  distrib- 
uted by  liim  to  the  proper  numbers  at  the  con:»mand 
Take  equipments  from  the  instructor,  lie  receives 
them  again  at  tlie  command  IIeplaci-:  equipmknts, 
makiag  such  disposition  of  then-j  as  may  be  directed. 

Limbering. 
To  the  front:    The  instructor  commands  : 

Limber  to  the  eront. 

* 

At  this  command  No.  1  steps  up  between  the  muzzle 
and  the  wheel,  by  the  oblique  step  indicated  for  load- 
ing, turns  the  staff,  seizing  it  with  the  l<eft  hand,  at 
the  same  time  shiftino-  his  riu'ht,  the  back  of  the  rio-ht 
up,  that  of  the  left  down,  and  passes  the  sponge  on  its 
liook,  rammer  head  to  the  rear,  to  No.  3,  who  receives 
the  head,  secures  it  against  the  stop,  and  keys  it  up. 
The  piece  is  then  brought  about  I)y  the  cannoneers, 
and  the  limber,  inclining  to  the  right,  passes  to  its 
place  in  front  of  it,  being  drawn,  when  it  is  not 
horsed,  by  Nos.  G  and  7,  who  take  hold  at  the  end  of 
the  pole  for  the  i)urpose. 

To  bring  the  piece  about,  the  gunner  and  No.  5  pass 
to  the  right  of  the  handspike,  and,  facing  towai'd  the 
left,  seize  it,  the  gunner  near  the  q\\l\,  and  No.  5 
near  the  middle,  and  on  his  right,  raise  the  trail  and 
carry  it  round  to  the  left;  Nos.  1  and  2  bear  down 


SCHOOL    OF    TTTK    PTECr.  33 

upon  the  muzzle,  and  Nos.  o  and  4,  each  using  bolli 
Ijands,  bi'ing  the  wheels  rou-nd,No.  o  tui*ning  tlie  right 
wlicel  to  tlie  rear,  and  No.  4  tlio  ]vi\  wlteol  to  the 
fVojit.  When  tl)e  ])ie('e  is  hroiight  ahoiil  the-  trail  is 
h)\vei'ed;  Nos.  :>  and  4  stv^p  williin  thr  w  heels,  to  avoid 
the  liinhei-;  .Xos.  1  and  -5  remain  at  the  muzzle,  and 
the  irnnner  and  No.  5  step  between  Nos.  )>  and  4  and 
the  trail,  the  gunner  lirst  taking  out  the  handspik'e, 
and  passing  it  to  No.  4,  by  whom  it  is  put  up. 

As  soon  as  tlie  limber  is  in  IVonl  of  the  ])iece  tlie 
gunner  commands:  Halt;  TjImukii  up;  upon  whieh 
the  limber  halts,  the  gunner  and  No.  o  raise  the  ti-ail 
by  means  of  the  handles,  and,  [insisted  by  Nos.  8  and 
4  at  tlie  wheels,  and  Nos.  1  and  2  at  the  head  of  the 
carriage,  run  the  piece  forward,  and  ])lace  the  lunette 
upon  the  pinile;  the  gunner  then  puts  in  the  key,  and 
all  take  their  posts;  when  necessary,  Nos.  G  and  7 
assist  at  the  trail  in  bringing  the  ])iece  about,  and  in 
limbering  up. 

To  the  right  (or  Icff).     The  instructor  commands: 

Limber  to  the  right  (or  left). 

The  trail  is  turned  to  the  right  (or  left),  and  the 
piece  limbered  up  as  before,  the  limber  inclining  to  the 
right  (or  left),  and  taking  its  ])lace  by  a  right  (or  left) 
wheel. 

To  the  renr.     The  instructor  comn\ands  :• 

Limber  to  the  rear. 

The  liml)er  inclines  to  the  right,  ami  takes  its  place 
by  Avheeling  about  to  the  left,  and  the  piece  is  then 
limbered  up  as  before. 


34  school  of  the  piece. 

Posts  of  the  Cannoneers.     Piece  Limbered. 

NoH,  1  and  2  arc  opposite  the  muzzle;  Nos.  3  and  4 
oppo.site  tlic  knob  of  the  cascabel ;  the  gunner  and 
No.  5  opposite  the  rear,  and  Nos.  0  and  7  opposite 
the  front  parts  of  the  limber  wheels;  No.  8  is  on  the 
left,  and  opposite  the  limber  chest  of  the  caisson.  All 
face  to  the  front,  and  cover  each  other  in  lines  one 
yard  from  the  wheels,  the  even  numbers  on  the  right, 
the  odd  numbers  on  the  lefc.  The  chief  of  the  piece 
is  on  the  left,  and,  if  not  mounted,  o])posite  the  end  of 
the  pole;  if  mounted,  he  is  near  the  leading  driver, 
aiul  on  his  left. 

To  Form  the  Detachment. 

To  thrfront     The  instructor  commands: 

'Detachment — front. 

The  gunner  commands :  Cannoneers,  for icnrd ^  March  ; 
the  even  numbers  move  directly  to  the  front;  the  odd 
numbers  closing  on  them  when  clear  of  the  piece. 
The  gunner  files  them  to  the  left,  and  fronts  the  de- 
tachment at  the  proper  distance.  No.  8  moves  direct- 
ly forward,  and  takes  his  place  in  the  detachment. 

To  the  rear.     The  instructor  commands  : 

Detachment — rear. 

The  gunner  commands:  Cannoneers,  rear  face  — 
March.  At  the  command  March,  the  odd  numbers 
move  directly  to  the  rear,  the  even  numbers  closing 
on  them,  and  the  detachment  is  filed  to  the  left,  halted 
at  a  proper  distance  by  the  gunner,  and  faced  to  tlio 
front;  No.  8  taking  his  proper  place  in  the  detach- 
ment. 


SCHOOL    OF    TirE    PIECE  35 

In  forming  detacliments  in  line,  i\\oy  arc  alwa3'a, 
after  lialting,  dressed  to  Uie  right  by  the  gunner. 

Posts  or  the  1)etacii:\ients  at  tiikir  Pieces. 

In  front.  The  detachment  is  in  line  facing  to  the 
front,  two  yards  from  the  end  of  tlie  pole  or  the  load 
horses. 

Jn  rear.  The  centre  of  the  detachment  is  tico  yards 
behind  the  muzzle,  and  facing  to  it. 

On  the  rujht  or  left.  The  detachment  is  in  line  opj)0- 
sile  the  limber  axle-tree,  and  three  yards  from  it.  In 
all  it  faces  to  the  front. 

C'riANOE  OF  Posts  of  IJktaciiments  yVT  tiikir   Pieces. 

From  front  to  rear.  The  detachments  being  in  line, 
in  front  of  their  pieces,  to  post  them  in  rear,  the  in- 
structor commands : 

Detachments — hear. 

The  gunner  commands:  Cannoneers,  rear  face  — 
March.  At  the  command  March,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4 
oblique  sufficiently  to  the  left,  and  Nos.  5,  6,  7,  and  8 
to  the  right,  move  along  the  sides  of  their  piece, 
reunite  as  soon  as  they  have  passed  it,  and  are  Inilted 
at  the  proper  distance,  faced  to  the  front,  and  aligned 
to  the  right  bj''  the  gunner. 

From  rear  to  front.     The  instructor  commands  : 

Detachments — front. 

The  gunner  repeats  the  command,  and  adds  — 
March.  At  this  command  the  cannoneers  oblique: 
Nos.  1,  2,  i),  aiul  4  to  the  right;  I^os.  5,  6,  7,  and  8  to 
the  left;  jjaSvS  their  piece,  reunite  in  front,  and  are 
hailed  'A\)(\  alignc'l  to  the  right  by  the  gunner. 


"^'^0  SCFTOOL    OF    TTTF.    PIECE. 

From  rear  to  right  (or  /(-//)  The  iiisti-actor  coin- 
m  nil  (.Is  : 

Detach MKXT8 — iironT  (oi'  left). 

^ho  gunner  coininauds  rUjht  (or  A//)  ohlique,  March, 
Mud  afterward  FoinvARr),  and  Halt,  in  time  to  brinic 
the  detachment  to  its  ]iost  on  the  right  or  loft.  lie 
then  aligns  it  to  the  I'ight. 

To  Post  the  Cannoneers  at  the  Pieces  LTMr>ERED. 

The  detachment  being  formed  in  line  in  front  or 
rear,  on  the  right  or  left,  the  instructor  commands: 

Cannoneers,  to  your  posts. 

From  the  front.  The  gunner  fixces  the  detachhiGnt 
to  the  right,  and  commands:  To  your  posts,  March. 
At  this  command  the  cannoneers  Nos.  1  and  2,  turn- 
ing to  the  right,  and  opening  out,  file  to  their  posts; 
lialt  at  their  proper  places,  and  face  to  the  front. 

From  the  rear,  right,  or  left.  At  the  command  Can- 
noneers, TO  YOUR  posts,  the  gunner,  in  each  case, 
faces  the  detachment  to  the  left,  and  marches  the 
cannoneers  by  that  fiank  to  their  posts. 

Posts  of  the  Cannoneers  on  the  Chests. 

Dui'ing  the  man(euvres  the  cannoneers  arc  cither 
at  their  posts  or  they  are  seated  on  the  ammunition 
chests  as  follows:  the  gunner  and  ]\''os.  5  and  6  on 
the  limber  chest  of  the  piece,  the  gunner  on  the  right 
and  No.  5  on  the  left;  Nos.  1,  2,  and  7  on  the  limber 
chest  of  the  caisson,  No.  2  on  the  right  and  No.  1  on 
the  left;  Nos.  3,  4,  and  8  on  the  middle  chest  of  the 
caisson.  No.  4  on  the  right,  and  No.  3  on  the  left. 

When  circumstances  require  it,  Nos.  G  and  7  may 


sriiooL  OF  Till";  riEr'E.  S;7 

bo  dii'cctcd  io  mount  Iho  rear  clicst  of*  tlic  caisson. 
They  sit  Avith  their  backs  to  tbc  IVont,  No.  6  on  tbc 
riii-bt. 

To  Mount  and  DrsMouxT  -niv.  Cannonekhs. 

7a  mount.  The  instructor  halls  the  carriages^  \i'  not 
ahead}'  at  a  hall,  ;ind  coniiuands  : 

1,   Cannoneers^  prepeire  lo  nioimf.     2.   MoUiNT. 

At  tlie  first  coniinand  the  cannoneers  run  to  (.heir 
respective  pbices,  and  stand  facing  the  clicsts  which 
they  are  to  nionnt,  tiie  gunner  and  No.  5  in  rear 
ot*  the  gun  liniber,  No.  (3  on  the  right  of  the  gunner, 
Nos.  1  and  2  in  rear  of  tlie  caisson  limber,  No.  7  on 
the  left  of  No.  },  NoH.  ')  and  I  in  front  of  the  middle 
cheat  of  the  caisson,  No  .S  on  tlu^  right  of  No.  o.  The 
gunner  and  Nos.  'I  and  o  seize  the  handles  with  the 
right  liand,  and  step  upon  tlie  stocks  with  the  left 
foot,  and  Nos.  5,  1,  and  4  seize  the  handles  with  the 
left  hand,  and  stej)  upon  the  stocks  with  the  right 
foot. 

At  the  command  Mount,  the  gunner,  and  Nos.  1, 
2,  o,  4,  and  5  spring  into  their  seats.  The  gunner, 
and  Nos.  5,  1,  and  2  seat  themselves  in  their  places, 
with  their  backs  to  the  front,  and  immediately  face 
jiboiit  by  throwing  their  legs  outward  over  the  han- 
dles. 

No.  S  then  sin-ings  itito  his  seat  in  the  same  manner 
as  No.  fj;  Nos.  6  and  7  step  in  rear  of  thajr  chests, 
place  their  hands  iipoji  them,  step  upon  the  stocks 
with  their  nearest  feet,  spring  up,  stc])  over  the  boxes, 
and  take  their  seats,  placing  their  hands  on  the  shoul- 
ders of  the  men  already  seated  in  order  to  steady 
themselves. 


38  SCHOOL  OF  the  piece. 

AYhen  the  command  Cannoneers,  Mount  is  given  by 
itself,  the  men  run  to  their  places  and  spring  into  their 
seats  at  once,  No.  8  talcing  his  seat  before  No.  3. 

To  dismount.  The  instructor  halts  the  carriages  as 
before,  and  commands  : 

1.   Cannoneers,  "prepare  to  dismount.     2.  Dismount. 

At  the  iirst  command  the  cannoneers  stand  up  in 
their  places,  except  the  gunner  and  No.  5,  who  face 
about.  At  the  second  comniand  the  whole  jnmp  off 
and  run  to  their  posts. 

When  the  command  Cannoneers,  Dismount  is  o'ivcn 
by  itself,  the  men  jump  from  their  chests  in  the  same 
manner. 

The  cannoneers  always  dismount  at  the  command 
Action  pront,  right,  or  left.  They  also  dismount 
at  the  command  In  battery,- as  soon  as  the  carriage 
on  wliich  they  are  mounted  halts. 

The  object  of  mounting  the  cannoneers  on  the  am- 
munition chests  is  generally  to  enable  the  battery  to 
make  quick  movements.  Care  should  be  taken  when 
the  ground  is  unfavorable,  or  the  movements  aro 
likely  to  be  prolonged,  not  to  mount  them  so  often  as 
to  be  injurious  to  the  horses.  After  they  are  "well  in- 
structed in  mounting  and  dismounting  at  a  halt,  the 
cannoneers  may  be  ordered  to  mount  and  dismount 
while  the  carriages  are  in  march  at  a  walk. 

When  a  caisson  is  absent,  or  temporarily  disabled, 
and  a  quick  movement  is  necessary,  Nos.  1,  2,  and 
3  will  mount  the  off-horses  of  the  piece.  No.  2  the 
lead,  No.  1  the  middle,  and  No.  3  the  wheel-horse, 
Nos.  1  and  3  passing  by  the  rear  of  the  gun.  This 
arrangement  may  also  be  resorted  to  in  case  of  a  sud- 
den  alarm,  the  drivers  of  the   caissons  assisting   the 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    PIECE.  39 

drivers  of  the  pieces  by  harnessing-  tlieir  off-liorscs  and 
hitching  them  in.  The  cannoneers  then  mount  as 
directed,  and  the  pieces  move  off.  The  remaining 
cannoneers  assist  the  drivers  of  the  caissons  to  liar- 
ncss  and  hitch  in  their  horses,  and  then  mount  the 
chests  of  tlic  caissons,  which  proceed  at  once  to  join 
their  pieces. 

MoviNt;  TiiK  Piece  ry  Kanm).     Pjece  Limbered. 

To  the  front.     The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March,     o.  Halt. 

^\t  the  lirst  command  Nos.  0  and  7  seize  the  end  of 
the  pole  with  both  hands,  the  gunner  and  No.  5  facing 
toward  the  pole,  seize  the  splinter  bar  with  one  hand 
and  the  pole  with  the  other;  Nos.  8  and  4  seize  the 
spokes  of  the  hind  wheels  with  both  hands,  and  Nos. 
1  and  2  apply  both  hands  at  the  head  of  the  carriage. 
At  the  second  command  all,  acting  together,  ui'ge  the 
piece  forward  until  the  command  Halt  is  given,  when 
all  resume  their  posts.     Figure  21. 

Moving  the  Piece  by  Ilcind. 

To  the  rear.     The  instructor  commands: 

1.  Backward.     2.  March.     ;J.  Halt. 

At  the  first  command  all  face  to  the  rear;  Nos.  G 
and  7  seize  the  end  of  the  pole  with  both  hands;  No. 
5  and  the  gunner  seize  the  spokes  of  the  limber,  and 
Nos.  1,  2,  8,  and  4  those  of  the.  hind  wheels.  At  the 
command  March,  all,  moving  together,  move  the  piece 
to  the  rear,  Nos.  (3  and  7  keeping  it  straight  by  the 
use  of  the  pole.  At  the  command  Halt,  all  resumu 
their  posts. 


40  school  of  the  piece. 

Unlimbering  and  Coming  into  Action. 

To  the  front.     The  instructor  commands  : 
Action  tront. 

At  this  command  the  gunner  takes  out  the  key, 
and,  assisted  by  No.  5,  raises  the  trail  from  the  pintle, 
and  then  commands  Drive  on,  upon  which  Nos.  G  and 
7  reverse  the  limber  to  the  left,  and  proceed  with  it  to 
the  rear;  again  reverse  to  the  left,  and  halt  so  that 
the  limber  shall  cover  the  piece,  with  the  end  of  the 
pole  6'iif  yards  from  the  end  of  the  trail  handspike. 
At  the  same  time  that  the  limber  moves  oft'  the  piece 
is  brought  about  in  all  respects  as  in  limbering  to  the 
front,  except  that  the  gunner  and  No.  5,  without  low- 
ering the  trail,  carry  it  about,  each  by  means  of  the 
handle  on  his  own  side.  Nos.  6  and  7,  when  neces- 
sarj',  assist  at  the  trail,  after  placing  the  limber  in 
position. 

As  soon  as  the  piece  is  brought  about,  and  the  trail 
lowered,  No.  4  takes  out  the  handspike  and  passes  it 
to  the  gunner,  who  fixes  it  in  the  trail.  No.  1  takes 
out  the  sponge,  No.  3  unkeying  it,  and  No.  4  prepares 
his  lanyard.     All  then  resume  their  posts. 

To  the  right  (or  left).     The  instructor  commands: 
Action  right  (or  left). 

The  piece  is  unlimbered  and  placed  in  the  required 
direction,  and  the  limber  wheels  to  the  left  (or  right), 
and  takes  its  place  in  rear,  by  reversing  to  the  left 
(or  right). 

To  the  rear.     The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Fire  to  the  rear.     2.  In  battery. 

At  the  command  In  battery,  the  piece  is  unlim- 
bered as  before,  the  trail  immediately  lowered,  and 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    PIECK.  -11 

tlie  gun  prepared  for  action.  The  limber  moves  di- 
rectly forward  at  the  command  Drive  on  from  tlie 
gunner,  and  takes  its  place  by  coming  to  the  left 
about. 

Service  of  the  (thn  with  Diminisiik])  Nlijmbers. 

The  men  should  be  frequently  exercised  in  serving 
pieces  with  diminished  numbers,  that  each  may  know 
the  duties  he  has  to  perform  in  such  cases. 

Disabled  men  are  replaced  as  soon  as  j^ossible  by 
the  highest  numbers,  or,  if  men  are  selected  to  replace 
them,  the  highest  numbers  will  be  reduced  to  fill  the 
vacancies  thus  created.  During  action,  Nos.  1  and  2 
may  occasionalh'  change  places  and  n\nnbers,  as  the 
duties  of  No.  1  are  very  severe. 

iService  of  the.  ijun  bij  two  men.  Tin?  gunner  com- 
mands, points,  serves  tlie  vent,  and  fires;  No^  1 
sponges,  loads,  and  serves  ammunition. 

Three  men.  IMie  gunner  commands,  points,  serves 
the  vent,  and  fii'es;  No.  1  sponges;  No.  2  loads,' and 
serves  ammunition. 

Fou?'  ')nen.  The  gunner  commands  and  points;  No. 
1  sponges;  No.  2  loads,  and  serves  ammunition ;  No. 
3  serves  the  vent,  and  fires. 

Five  men.  The  gunner  commands  and  points;  No. 
1  sponges;  No.  2  loads;  No.  8  serves  the  vent,  :ind 
tires;  No.  4  serves  ammunition. 

Six  men.  The  gunner  commands  and  points;  No. 
1  sponges;  No.  2  loads;  No.  3  serves  the  vent,  and 
lires;  Nos.  4  and  5  serve  ammunition. 

Seven  men.  The  gunner  commands  and  points  ;  No. 
1  s])onges;  No.  2  loads;  No.  3  serves  the  vent,  and 
altencfa  to  the  trail;  No.  4  tires;  No.  6  is  at  the  lim- 
4 


42 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    PIECE. 


ber,    serves   ammunition    to    No.  5,  and  occasionally 
chano'cs  witli  him. 

Eight  men.     No.  7  assists  No.  6;  the  other  numbers 
as  before. 


Table  for  the  Exercise  with  Diminished  Numbers. 


Nos.  Retain lii). 

DlSTlUBUTlON  OF  DuTIKS. 

Gtinner. 

G.  3,  4 
G.  3,  4 

G. 

G. 

G. 

G. 

G. 

I 

1,2,5 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

G    J 

Or            \             2 

2,5 
2,5 

2 

2 
2 

2 

G.  1,  2,  3 

a  1.  2  3  4 

3,4 
.3,4 
3,4 

3 

3 

5 

6 
4 

4 

G.  1.  2   3  4.  5 

5 
5 
5 

G.  1.  2,  3,  4,  5.  fi 

G.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  C,  7 

6 
6 

'V 

Supply  of  Ammunition  in  Action. 

When  it  is  likely  that  movements  must  take  place 
on  the  field,  or  the  firing  is  slow,  and  it  can  be  done 
without  inconvenience,  ammunition  will  be  served 
direct  from  the  rear  chest  of  the  caisson,  No.  8  per- 
forming the  duties  prescribed  for  No.  6  at  the  limber 
chest.  At  convenient  moments  the  ammunition 
served  out  b}'  No.  ()  will  be  i-eplaced  from  the  rear 
caisson  chest. 


A  RTF  OLE  IV. 
MECHANICAL  MANGilUVRES. 

Changing  Wheels. 

Napoleon,  Q- pounder  gnn,  and  VI -pounder  hoivitzer. 
The  piece  being  unlimbered,  to  change  the  right 
wheel,  the  instructor  commands: 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    PIECE.  43 

1.  Prepare  to  change  the  right  loheel.     2.  Change  the 

WHEEL. 

At  tlic  first  command  jSTos.  5,  6,  and  7  dismount  the 
Hparc  wheel ;  No.  5  brings  it  near,  and  parallel  to  the 
disabled  one,  leaving  room  for  the  latter  to  be  taken 
off.  The  gunner  2)asses  one  end  of  his  handspike  to 
No.  1,  placing  it  under  the  axle-tree  close  to  the 
shoulder.  The  gunner  and  No.  1,  placing  themselves 
between 'the  handspike  and  piece,  and  facing  the 
wheel,  take  hold  of  the  handspike  near  the  axle;  Nos. 
4  and  6  take  hold  of  the  ends  of  the  handspike,  No.  6 
assisting  the  gunner. 

At  the  command  Change  the  wheel,  the  carriage 
is  raised;  Nop.  2  and  3  take  off  the  disabled  wheel; 
No.  2  runs  it  to  tlic  rear,  and  Nos.  3  and  5  put  on  the 
spare  wheel,  No.  3  taking  hold  of  it  in  the  rear.  Nos. 
3  and  4  attend  to  the  linchpins  and  washers  on  their 
respective  sides. 

To  change  the  left  wheel,  the  gunner  and  _No.  2, 
assisted  by  Nos.  G  and  No.  3  respectively,  man  the 
handspike;  Nos.  1  and  4  take  off  the  wheel;  Nos  5, 
6,  and  7  dismount  the  spare  wheel ;  No.  5  brings  it  up, 
and  Nos.  4  and  5  put  it  on  ;  No.  1  runs  the  disabled 
wheel  to  the  rear. 

The  men  at  the  handspike  must  raise  the  end  of  the 
axle-tree  sufficiently  high  to  throw  the  weight  on  the 
other  wheel,  and  those  who  take  off  the  wheel  must 
also  lift  it,  and  not  increase  the  weight  by  allowing 
it  to  slide  along  the  axle-tree. 

VZ-pdr.  gun  and  24:-pdr.  howitzer.  One  end  of  a  pro- 
lono'C  is  fastened  to  the  axle-tree  near  the  disabled 
wheel,  the  other  end  being  passed  over  the  opposite 
wheel,  and  manned  by  four  men  from  another  piece. 
A  spare  polo,  manned  by  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5^  and  6,  must 


44  SCHOOL    OF   THE   PIECE. 

be  substituted  for. the  handspike  under  the  nxle-tree. 
The  gunner  and  No.  7  take  off  and  put  on  the  wheels. 
When  a  spare  pole  can  not  be  obtained,  the  carriage 
may  be  raised  by  means  of  the  handspikes  j  No.  2 
places  one  in  the  muzzle,  and  No.  1  crosses  the  other 
under  it;  No.  3  assists  at  the  handspike  in  the  muzzle, 
and  JS^os.  4,  5,  and  6  at  the  other,  No.  4  on  the  out- 
side. The  four  men  from  the  other  piece  take  hold  of 
the  cheeks  on  the  side  to  be  raised.  All,  acting  to- 
gether, raise  the  carriage  at  the  command  Change 
THE  WHEEL.  The  prolougc  is  not  required.  The  ma- 
noeuvre would  be  made  easier  by  digging  a  trench  five 
or  six  inches  deep  for  the  other  wheel. 

When  a  wheel  at  the  piece  is  disabled  in  action,  it 
may  be  replaced  by  one  from  its  limber.  The  disabled 
wheel,  if  not  quite  unserviceable,  may  be  used  at  the 
limber  until  it  can  be  convenient^  changed;  but,  if 
entirely  unserviceable,  one  must  be  obtained  from  the 
caisson  as  soon  as  it  is  possible  to  bring  it  up. 

In  taking  off  a  limber  wheel  the  horses  are  taken 
out;  No.  6  removes  the  linchpin  and  washer;  Nos.  3 
and  4,  assisted  by  Nos.  7  and  8,  raise  the  limber,  No.  3 
in  front  and  No.  4  in  rear  of  the  axle-tree;  Nos.  5  and 
6  take  off  the  w4ieel,  and  No.  5  runs  it  forward.  The 
axle-tree  is  lowered  gently  to  the  ground. 

The  wheel  of  the  limber  is  replaced  by  Nos.  1,  '2,  5, 
and  6  after  the  wiieel  of  the  piece  is  on,  Nos.  1  and  2 
raising  the  limber,  assisted  by  Nos.  7  and  8. 

When  a  Avheel  has  been  disabled  in  the  carriaire  of 
either  piece  or  caisson,  and  can  not  be  replaced  by  an- 
other, a  spar  ten  or  twelve  feet  long  may  be  placed 
under  the  axle-tree,  with  one  end  resting  on  the  ground 
and  the  other  secured  to  the  carriage  b}^  lashing,  so 
ihtxi  the  jvxle-trcc  may  be  supported  in  its  ];)roper  po- 


SOHOOJ.    OF    THE    PIECE.  45 

sition  without  the  wheel.  Tlie  part  of  the  carriage 
thus  supported  sliould  be  relieved  of  as  much  weight 
as  possible. 

When  a  wheel  has  been  so  disabled  that  it  can  not 
turn,  a  slioe  of  wood  may  be  made  and  placed  under 
it.  A  piece  of  spar  about  three  feet  long  and  nine 
inches  in  diameter,  with  a  groove  in  one  side  to  re- 
ceive the  felloe,  will  answer  for  this  purpose.  The 
end  in  front  is  given  the  proper  form,  and  the  lock 
chain  fastened  to  it.  In  this  case,  also,  the  carriage 
should  be  relieved  from  as  much  weight  as  possible. 

i^isMOUNTiNG  Pieces. 

Napoleon,  6-pdr.  gun  and  V2-pdr.  howitzer.  Thepie<ic 
being  unlimbered,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Prepare  to  dismount  the  piece.    2.  Dismount  the  pi  ece. 

At  the  first  command  Nos.  1,  2,  o,  and  4  remove 
the  implements  and  place  them  on  the  ground,  out- 
side of  their  respective  wheels,  the  bucket  with  a 
sponge  and  handspike  on  the  right,  and  the  worm 
with  a  sponge  and  handspike  on  the  left.  N^os.  1  and 
2  then  press  upon  the  muzzle,  and  Nos.  »>  and  4,  after 
removing  the  cap  squares,  station  themselves  at  the 
end  of  the  cheeks,  and,  with  one  hand  on  the  wheel 
and  the  other  on  the  knol.)  of  the  cascuibel,  prepare 
to  raise  the  breech.  The  gunner,  first  taking  out  the 
liandspike,  if  in  the  trail,  and  passing  it  to  No.  4, 
raises  the  elevating-screw  to  its  greatest  height,  and 
then  seizes  the  left  trail  handle;  No.  5  seizes  the 
right,  and  Nos.  G  and  7,  after  scotching  the  wheels, 
go  to  the  trail  to  assist  in  raising  it. 

7\t  the  second  command  Nos.  1  and  2  l)ear  down 
upnii  the  muzzle,  the  gunner  and  Nos.  o,  <>,  and  7  raisv 


4Q  SCHOOL    OF    THE    riECE. 

the  trail  until  the  muzzle  rests  upon  the  ground,  No.  5, 
with  the  howitzer,  holding  the  lock  chain  to  prevent 
the  chjxin  from  foiling  over  to  the  front.  Nos.  3  and 
4  push  against  the  cascabel  to  raise  the  breech,  and, 
when  the  piece  is  vertical,  run  -around  to  assist  Nos. 

1  and  2  to  keep  it  in  that  position.  The  trail  is  then 
lowered,  the  carriage  run  back,  and  the  piece  placed, 
on  the  ground,  vent  upward.  The  cannoneers  then 
replace  the  implements,  Nos.  8  and  4  securing  the  cap 
sipiares. 

12 -jjdr.  (jun  and  2.A'pdr.  howitzer.  These  are  dis- 
mounted in  the  same  manner,  except  that  Nos.  1  and 

2  make  a  hole  in  the  ground  under  the  head  of  the 
carriage,  one  foot  deep  for  the  12-pdr.,  and  eight  inches 
for  the  howitzer,  to  receive  the  muzzle,  and  they  are 
assisted  by  two  additional  men  in  pressing  upon  the 
muzzle  and  in  steadying  the  piece. 

By  attaching  the  middle  of  a  rope  with  an  artificer's 
knot  to  the  knob  of  the  cascabel,  and  hauling  upon 
the  ends  of  it,  the  piece  may  be  more  securely  steadied. 
Nos.  3  and  4  attach  the  rope,  pass  the  ends  over  to 
Nos.  1  and  2,  and  then  go  around  to  assist  them  in 
hauling.  Four  additional  men  from  another  piece  also 
assist.  When  the  trail  is  raised  so  as  to  lot  the  muz- 
zle touch  the  bottom  of  the  hole,  the  men  haul  upon 
the  rope  and  disengage  the  gun,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4 
coming  up  hand  over  hand  to  steady  it. 

A  rope  may  also  be  used  in  dismounting  the  6-pdr. 
gun  and  12-pdr.  howitzer.  Nos.  1  and  2  man  the  rope, 
and  Nos.  3  and  4  steady  the  wheels.  No  additional 
men  are  required, 

MoiiNTfNa  Pieces. 

Xi-pdr.  gun  and  12-pdr.  hon-ltzer.  The  piece  being  on 
the  gronnd,  vent  upward.  t!io  instruolor  oommands: 


i 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    PIECE.  47 

1.  Prepare  to  mount  the  piece.     2.  MoUxNT  the  tiece. 

At  the  first  command  the  in\plcmcnts  are  removed 
an  in  dismounting,  except  that  tlic  handspikes,  instead 
of  being  placed  on  tlie  ground,  arc  ]->;issed' by  Nos.  8 
and  4  resjiectively  to  the  gunner  and  No.  2;  Noa.  o 
and  4  take  oif  the  cap  squares;  No.  2  inserts  his  liand- 
spike  in  the  bore,  and,  assisted  by  No.  1,  raises  the 
chase,  so  that  the  gunner  may  put  his  handspiicc 
under  the  piece  a  little  in  rear  of  the  trunnions. 

This  being  done,  No.  2  withdraws  his  iiandspike 
from  the  bore,  and  places  it  under  the  knob  of  tho 
cascabel.  Nos.  1,  3,  and  4  assist  at  the  handspike  of 
No.  2,  and  Nos.  5,  0,  and  7  at  that  of  the  gunner; 
Nos.  1,  2,  5,  and  the  gunner  being  at  the  ends.  The 
gunner  then  commands  Heave,  upon  which  the  men, 
acting  together,  raise  the  piece  upright,  and  Nos.  1, 
2,  3,  and  4  stead}^  it  in  that  positi.on.  The  gunner 
and  No.  5  go  to  the  trail,  and,  assisted  by  6  and  7 
at  the  wheels,  run  the  carriage  forward,  within  a  foot 
of  the  piece.  Nos.  6  and  7  scotch  the  wheels,  if  nec- 
essary, and  then  go  to  the  trail  to  assist  the  gunner 
and  No.  5  in  raising  it. 

At  the  second  command  the  trail  is  raised.  No.  5, 
with  the  howitzer,  holding  the  lock  chain  to  prevent 
the  trail  from  falling  over  to  the  front;  Nos.  1  and  2 
push  gently  against  the  piece,  and  place  the  trunn- 
ions in  their  plates.  The  trail  is  then  lowered  care- 
fuU}'  to  the  ground,  the  wheels  unscotched,  and  the 
implements  replaced,  Nos.  3  and  4  securing  the  cap 
squares.  When  necessary,  the  duties  of  Nos.  0  and  7 
can  bo  performed  by  Nos.  3  and  4. 

The  piece  may  be  also  easily  raised  by  means  of  a 
rope,  without  the  use  of  handspikes.  The  gunner 
iixes  the  middle  of  the  rope  to  the  knob  of  the  cas- 


/ 


48  SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    I'lECE. 

cabel  by  an  artificer's  knot,  and  Nos.  1,  2,^3,  4,- 5,  and 
6  man  the  ends,  Nos.  1  and  2  being  nearest  the  eas- 
cabel.  By  hauling  upon  the  rope  tlie  piece  is  raised. 
It  is  then  mounted  as  before. 

l'2-pdr.  gun  and  2A-pdr.  howitzer.  These  ar^  mount- 
ed by  means  of  handspikes  in  the  same  manner  as  the 
6-pdr.  gun  and  12-pdr.  howitzer,  except  that  Nos.  1 
and  2  make  a  hole  in  the  ground,  one  foot  deej)  for  the 
12-pdr.,  and  eight  inclies  for  the  howitzer,  to  receive 
tl)e  muzzle,  and  two  additional  men  act  at  the  han- 
dles. 

it  will  facilitate  the  raising  of  the  piece,  and  give 
greater  securitj'^,  to  fasten  the  handspike  to  the  casca- 
bel  by  means  of  a  rope,  and  also  to  fasten,  by  an  arti- 
ficer's knot,  the  middle  of  a  proh^nge  or  picket  rope 
to  the  cascabel,  and  man  the  ends  of  it  by  men  from 
another  piece.  In  tliis  case,  when  the  piece  is  raised 
as  high  as  the  man's  hips,  the  gunner  and  Nos.  5,  6, 
and  7  quit  the  handspike,  two  at  a  time,  and  assist  at 
the  prolongc.  Jn  placing  the  ])iece  on  the  carriage, 
Nos.  3  and  4  carry  the  prolonge  to  the  rear,  and  assist 
by  hauling  upon  it.  When  the  piece  does  not  fall  ex- 
actly into  the  trunnion  plates,  the  prolonge  is  passed 
round  under  tlic  cheeks  to  secure  the  breech  to  the 
caiU'iage;  the  tail  being  then  lowered,  the  trunnions 
slide  into  their  beds. 

(Jaiirvin({   i^ir,(;Ks. 

The  j)iece  being  on  the  ground,  vent  upward,  the 
instructor  commands : 

1.  Prepare  to  carry  the  piece.     2.  Forward.     3.  Matiimi. 

At  the  first  command  Nos.  0  and  7  back  the  lim- 
ber over  the  breeeli  until  tiic  }»intle-hook  is  just  above 


-Mk, 


SCHOOL  OP  THE   PIECE.  49 

the  trunnions;  No.  2  inserts  a  handspike  in  tlie  boro 
to  raise  the  piece,  and  Nos.  1,  8,  and  4  stand  near  to 
assist  him;  the  gunner,  assisted  by  No.  5,  passes  the 
ring  of  the  prolonge  through  the  handles,  and,  after 
making  a  turn  with  the  prolonge  round  the  pintle- 
Jiook,  passes  the  ring  through  the  handles  again  and 
puts  it  on  the  pintle.  If  there  are  no  handles,  the 
prolonge  should  be  passed  round  the  piece,  in  front 
and  rear  of  the  trunnions,  the  piece  being  raised  for 
that  purpose.  Nos.  6  and  7  then  raise  the  pole,  and 
Nos.  1,  2,  8,  and  4  the  piece,  if  not  already  raised;  the 
gunner  tightens  the  prolonge,  pulling  on  the  free  end, 
which  he  passes  over  the  pintle-hook  and  under  the 
limber  to  No.  5,  who  receives  it  at  the  splinter  bar, 
and  makes  a  turn  with  it  round  the  fork.  The  pole 
is  then  lowered,  and  Nos.  1  and  2  press  upon  the 
muzzle  and  raise  the  breech.  The  gunner,  assisted 
by  No.  5,  lashes  the  knob  of  the  cascabel  to  the  splin- 
ter bar,  fastening  the  end  of  the  prolonge  by  half- 
hitches.     The  piece  when  slung  should  be  horizontal. 

At  the  second  command  the  cannoneers  prepare  to 
move  the  limber  forward. 

At  the  command  March,  they  move  the  limber  to 
the.  front. 

When  the  horses  are  hitched  in',  they  should  be 
taken  out  to  enable  the  men  to  sling  the  piece. 

A  limber,  in  addition  to  carrying  the  jDiece,  may 
also  carry  a  disabled  carriage  when  it  is  taken  apart 
and  lashed  upon  it;  but,  as  the  weight  when  so  dis- 
tributed is  too  great  to  be  carried  far,  the  carriage 
Should  be  placed  upon  the  caisson  as  soon  as  it  can 
be  ^one. 

When  a  limber  is  disabled,  the  trail  of  the  carriage 
or  caisson  is  attached  to  the  rear  of  another  carriage. 
5 


/ 


50  SCHOOL    OF    THE    riKOE 


Dismounting  Carriages. 

Carriages  of  the  6-pdr.  gun  and  12-pdr.  howitzer.  The 
piece  being  dismounted  and  implements  taken  off,  as 
already  described,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Prepare  to  dismount  the  carriage.     2.  Dismount  the 

CARRIAGE. 

At  the  first  command  Nos.  3  and  4  remove  the 
linchx:)ins  and  washers,  and  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4  step 
inside  of  the  wheels  and  take  hold  of  the  carriage. 

At  the  second  command  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4  lift  the 
carriage,  Nos.  5  and  7  take  off  the  right  wheel,  and 
IS^'os.  6  and  8  the  left;  Nos.  5  and  6  taking  hold  in 
front,  and  Nos.  7  and  8  in  rear. 

If  necessary,  each  wheel  may  be  taken  off  by  one 
man. 

The  carriages  of  the  12-pdr.  gun  and  24-pdr.  howit- 
zer are  dismounted  in  the  same  manner,  with  the 
addition  of  two  or  four  men  to  assist  in  lifting  the 
carriages. 

Limbers.  The  limbers  are  dismounted  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  carriages;  the  different  numbers  taking 
hold  in  the  same  relative  positions,  and  performing 
the  same  duties. 

Mounting  Carriages. 

The  method  of  mounting  carriages  and  limbers  cor- 
responds to  that  of  dismounting  them. 

Changing  Ammunition  Chests.  ^^ 

In  service,  when  the  limber -chest  of  the  piece  is 

emptied,  the  piece  and  caisson  exchange  linibers;  No. 

.8,  assisted  by  No.  7,  unlimbers  and  limbers  up  the  cais- 


.  SCliOOL    OF    THE    PIECE.  51 

son,  and  the  middle  eheet  is  exchanged  with  tlie  empty 
onex)n  the  limber  aa  soon  as  practicable. 

To  change  the  ammunition  chests,  the   inytructor 
commandy: 

1.  Prepare  to  change  the  ammunition  chest.     2.  Change 

THE  CHEST. 

At  the  first  cominand  Nos.  5  and  0  iiidvcy  the  empty 
chest,  each  on  his  own  side,  and,  taking  hold  of  tlie 
Jiandles,  place  it  u])on  the  ground,  on  the  left  of  the 
caisson.  Nos.  7  and  8  unkey  the  middle  chest  at  tiic 
same  time. 

At  the  command  Change  the  chest,  Nos.  5,  6,  7, 
iind  8,  seizing  the  middle  chest  by  the  handles,  lift  it 
on  the  foot-board,  and,  turning  it  end  for  end  there, 
shift  the  chest  along  the  stock  to  the  limber,  taking- 
great  care  not  to  cut  the  bottom  on  the  nuts,  and  pu't 
it  in  place;  Nos.  5  and  6  resume  their  posts  immedi- 
ately; Nos.  7  and  8  key  the  chest,  replace  the  empty 
chest,  ke}'  it,  and  resume  their  posts. 

Efghting  Carriages  that  have  been  Overturn ed. 

When  a  carriage  has  been  overturned,  it  is  better, 
if  time  permits,  to  disengage  the  piece,  right  the  car- 
riage, and  then  mount  the  piece  again  in  the  manner 
already  described.  The  piece  may  be  easily  disen- 
gaged by  allowing  the  breech  to  rest  upon  tlie  ground, 
oi-  a  block  of  wood,  raising  the  muzzle  by  means  of  a 
handspike,  while  the  cap  squares  are  taken  off. 

The  carriage  may  be  righted,  however,  without  dis- 
engaging the  piece,  by  the  following  modes: 

Tst.  Detach  the  limber,  secure  the  cap  squares,  and 
lash  the  knob  of  the  cascabel  to  the  stock.  Place  the 
middle  of  a  rope  over  the  nave  of  one  wheel,  pass  the 


52  SdllOuL   OF   THE   IMECEV  . 

■at  iijift,.  fill  titiTitt,  1  rt 

ends  of  it  downward  between  the  lower  spokes  of 
that  wheel,  then  under  the  carriage,  through  the.cor- 
resjDonding  spokes  of  the  other  wheel,  and  then  up- 
ward over  the  wdiecl,  and  across  the  top  of  the  car- 
iMao-e,  to  the  side  where  it  was  first  attached.  The 
ends  of  the  rojie  and  the  wheel  to  be  raised  are  then 
manned,  and  the  carriage  drawn  over  to  its  upright 
position.  During  this  operation  two  men  are  required 
to  steady  the  trail. 

If  necessary,  the  ends  of  tlie  rope  nia}^  be  fastened 
to  the  limber,  and  horses  used  to  assist  in  righting 
the  carriage.  Great  care  must  be  taken  to  stop  the 
horses  in  time,  and  to  prevent  them  from  making  any 
more  effort  than  is  absolutely  necessary.  If  the  Avheel- 
horses  are  sufficient  the  leaders  may  be  unhitched. 

2d.  Detach  the  limber,  attach  two  prolonges,  or  the 
middle  of  a  picket  rope,  to  the  trail,  chock  the  wheels, 
and  dig  an  oblong  hole  under  the  muzzle,  about  two 
and  a  half  feet  deep.  Then  pass  one  of  the  prolonges, 
or  one  end  of  the  picket  rope,  over  the  carriage  to  the 
front,  and,  manning  both,  raise  the  trail,  and  pass  it 
over  the  axle-tree  to  the  ground  on  the  opposite  side. 

Light  carriages  may  be  righted  by  hand  without 
attaching  a  rope. 

Spiking  and  Unspiking  Cannon,  and  Rendering 
THEM  Unserviceable. 

To  spike  a  jnece,  or  to  render  it  unserviceable.  Drive 
into  the  vent  a  jagged  and  hardened  steel  spike  with  a 
soft  point,  or  a  nail  without  a  head;  break  it  off  flusli 
with  the  outer  surface,  and  clinch  the  point  inside  by 
means  of  the  rammer.  Wedge  a  shot  in  the  bottom 
of  the  bore  by  wrapping  it  with  felt,  or  by  means  of 
iron  wedges,  using  the  rammer  or  a  bar  of  iron  to 


SCHOOL  op  tttE  mece.  ,^.9 

drive  thcni  in  ;  a  wooden  Avcdge  would  be  easily  bm-nt 
by  means  of  a  charcoal  fire  lighted  with  the  aid  of  a 
bellows.  Cause  shells  to  burst  in  the  bore  of  bras« 
guns,  or  fire  broken  shot  from  them  Avith  high  charges, 
i^'ill  a  piece  with  sand  over  the  charge  to  burst  it. 
Fire  a  piece  against  anotlier,  muzzle  to  muzzle,  or  the 
muzzle  of  one  to  the  chase  of  the  other.  Light  a 
fire  under  the  chase  of  a  brass  gun,  and  strike  on  it 
with  a  sledge  to  bend  it.  Break  off  the  trunnions  of 
iron  guns;  or  burst  them  by  firing  them  with  heavy 
charges  and  full  of  shot  at  a  high  elevation. 

When  guns  are  to  be  spiked  temporarily,  and  are 
likely  to  be  j-etaken,  a  spring  spike  is  used,  having  a 
shoulder  to  prevent  its  being  too  easily  extracted. 

To  unspike  a  piece.  If  the  spike  is  not  screwed  in 
or  clinched,  and  the  bore  is  not  impeded,  put  in  a 
charge  of  powder  of  one-third  of  the  weight  of  the 
shot,  and  ram  junk  wads  over  it  with  a  handspike, 
laying  on  the  bottom  of  the  bore  a  strip  of  wood  with 
a  groove  on  the  under  side,  containing  a  strand  of 
quick  match,  by  which  fire  is  communicated  to  the 
charge.  In  a  brass  gun,  take  out  some  of  the  metal 
at  the  upper  orifice  of  the  vent,  and  pour  sulphuric 
acid  into  the  groove  for  some  hours  before  firino-.  If 
this  method,  several  times  repeated,  is  not  successful, 
unscre.w  the  vent-piece,  if  it  b(ia  brass  gun,  and,  if  an 
iron  one,  drill  out  the  spike  or  drill  a  new  vent. 
.  To  drive  out  a  shot  wedged  in  the  bore.  Unscrew  the 
vent-piece,  if  there  be  one,  and  drive  in  wedges  so  as 
to  start  the  shot  forward,  then  ram  it  back  in  order 
to  seize  the  wedge  with  a  hook;  or  pour  in  powder 
and  fire  it,  after  replacing  the  vent-piece.  In  the  last 
resort,  bore  a  hole  in  the  bottom  of  the  breech,  drive 
out  the  shot,  and  stop  the  hole  with  a  screw. 


54  SCHOOL    OF    TEIE    I'IKOE. 


Article  "V, 


t»0INTINO  AND  RANGK.S. 

To  point  a  piece  is  to  place  it  in  such  a  position  that 
the  shot  may  reach  the  object  it  is  intended  to  strike. 
To  do  this,  the  axis  of  the  trunnions,  being  horizontal, 
the  line  of  metal,  called  also  the  natural  line  of  sight, 
must  be  so  directed  as  to  pass  through  the  object,  and 
then  the  elevation  given  to  the  piece  to  throw  the  shot 
the  required  distance.  The  direction  is  given  from  the 
trail,  and  the  elevation  from  the  breech  ;  *he  trail  being 
traversed  by  a  handspike,  and  the  breech  raised  or 
dei)ressed  by  an  elevating-screw. 

The  axis  of  the  piece  coincides  with  that  of  the  cylin- 
der of  the  bore. 

The  line  of  sight  in  pointing  is  the  line  of  direction 
from  the  eye  to  the  object.  It  lies  in  a<vertical  plane, 
passing  through,  or  parallel  to,  the  axis  of  the  piece. 

The  angle  of  sight  is  the  angle  wliich  tlie  line  of  sight 
makes  with  the  axis  of  the  piece. 

The  natural  line  of  sight  is  the  straight  line  passing 
through  the  highest  points  of  the  base  ring  and  tlie 
swell  of  the  muzzle,  muzzle  sight,  or  muzzle  band. 

The  natural  angle  of  sight  is  the  angle  which  the  nat- 
ural line  of  sight  makes  with  the  axis  of  the  piece. 

The  dispart  of  a'piecc  is  half  the  difference  between 
the  diameters  of  the  base  ring  and  swell  of  the  muzzle, 
or  the  muzzle  band.  It  is  therefore  the  tangent  of 
the  natural  angle  of  sight  to  a  radius  equal  to  the 
distance  from  the  highest  point  of  the  swell  of  the 
muzzle  or  muzzle  band  to  the  plane  passing  through 
the  roar  of  the  base  rino-,  i;^::;.:. 


SCHOOL    OF   THE    PIECE.  55 

By  range  is  commonly  meant  the  distance  between 
the  piece  and  the  object  -which  the  ball  is  intended  to 
strike;  or  the  first  graze  of  the  ball  upon  the  horizon- 
tal plane  on  which  the  carriage  stands.  Point-blank 
range  is  the  distance  between  the  piece  and  the  point- 
bhink.  Extreme  range  is  the  distance  between  the 
piece  and  the  spot  where  the  ball  finally  rests. 

Theorif  of  pointing.  The  point-blank  is  the  second 
point  of  intersection  of  the  trajectory  or  curve  de- 
scribed b}^  the  projectile  in  its  flight  with  the  line  of 
sight.  As  the  angle  of  sight  is  increased  the  projec- 
tile is  thrown  farther  above  the  line  of  sii^ht,  and  the 
trajectory  and  point-bhank  distance  becomes  more  ex- 
tended. 

Tlie  point-blank  range  increases  with  the  velocity, 
the.  diameter,  and  the  density  of  the  ball.  It  is  also 
affected  by  the  inclination  of  the  line  of  sight;  but 
with  the  angles  of  elevation  used  in  field  service  this 
effect  is  too  small  to  be  taken  into  account. 

A  piece  is  said  to  be  umiQd  point-blank  vf\\Qn  the  line 
of  metal,  which  is  the  natural  line  of  sight,  is  directed 
upon  the  object.  This  must  be  the  case  when  the 
object  is  at  point-blank  distance.  When  at  a  greater 
distance,  the  pendulum-hausse  or  the  tangent  scale  is 
raised  upon  the  breech  until  the  sight  is  at  the  height 
whicii  the  degree  of  elevation  for  the  distance  may 
require.  An  artificial  lino  of  sight  and  an  artificial 
point-blank  arc  thus  obtained,  and  the  piece  is  aimed 
as  befoi'c. 

The  different  lines,  angles,  etc.,  which  an  artillery- 
man has  to  take  into  account  when  pointing,  will  be 
best  understood  by  the  following  figure  : 

E  P  c  tr  is  the  axis  of  the  piece.  P  g  D  is  the 
trajector}'  or  curve  described  by  the  projectile  in  its 


56  SCHOOL  or  the  piece. 

flight.     A  B  c  F  is  the  natural  line  of  sight.     A  c  B 
is  the  natural  angle  of  sight. 


The  projectile,  thrown  in  the  direction  of  the  axis 
E  P  c  G,  is  acted  upon  by  the  force  of  gravity,  and 
begins  to  fall  at  once  below  the  line  at  the  rate  of  1(H 
feet  for  one  second,  641-  for  two,  144|  for  three,  and  so 
on  in  proportion  to  the  time.  It  cuts  the  line  of  sight 
at  (x,  a  short  distance  from  the  muzzle  of  the  piece, 
and,  descending,  again  cuts  it  at  the  point  D.  This 
second  point  of  intersection  is  the  jyoint-blank. 

Pendulvm-hausse,  The  instrument  at  present  in 
most  general  use  in  pointing  field  guns  at  objects 
beyond  the  natural  point-blank,  is  called  a  pendulmn- 
havsse,  of  which  the  component  parts  are  denomi- 
nated the  scale,  the  slider,  and  the  seat.  The  scale. 
is  made  of  sheet  brass :  at  the  lower  end  is  a  brass 
bulb  filled  with  lead.  The  slide?'  is  of  thin  brass,  and 
is  retained  in  any  desired  position  on  the  scale  by 
means  of  a  brass  set-screw  with  a  milled  head.  The 
scale  is  passed  through  a  slit  in  a  ])iece  of  steely  with 
which  it  is  connected  by  a  brass  screw,  forming  a 
pivot  on  which  the  scale  can  vibraie  laterally:  this 
slit  is  made  long  enough  to  allow  the  scale  to  take  a 
vertical  position  in  any  ordinary  cases  of  inequality 
of  the  ground  on  which  the  wheels  of  the  carriage 
may  stand.  The  ends  of  this  piece  of  steel  form  two 
journals,  by  means  of  M^hich  the  scale  is  supported  on 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    PIECE.  57 

the  scat  attached  to  the  piece,  and  is  at  liberty  to 
vibrate  in  the  direction  of  the  axis  of  the  piece.  The 
seat  is  of  iron,  and  is  fastened  to  tlie  base  of  the  breech 
by  three  screws,  in  such  manner  that  the  centres  of 
the  two  journal  notches  shall  be  at  a  distance  from 
the  axis  equal  to  the  radius  of  the  base  ring. 

A  muzzle  sight  of  iron  is  screwed  into  the  swell  of 
the  muzzle  of  giins,  or  ini^o  the  middle  of  the  muzzle 
ring  of  howitzers.  The  height  of  this  sight  is  equal 
to  the  dispaj't  of  the  piece,  so  that  a  line  from  the  top 
of  the  muzzle  sight  to  the  2^ivot  of  the  scale  is  parallel 
to  the  axis  of  the  piece.  Consequently,  the  vertical 
plane  of  sight  passing  through  the  centre  line  of  the 
scale  and  top  of  the  muzzle  sight  will  be  also  parallel 
to  the  axis  in  any  position  of  the  piece  :  the  scale  will 
therefore  alwa3"s  indicate  correctly  the  angle  which 
the  line  of  sight  makes  with  the  axis.  The  seat,  for 
suspending  the  hausse  upon  the  piece  is  adapted  to 
each  piece  according  to  the  varying  inclination  of  the 
base  of  the  breech  to  the  axis.  The  hausse,  the  seat, 
and  the  muzzle  sight,  varying  as  they  do  in  their  con- 
struction and  arrangement,  according  to  the  configura- 
tion of  the  piece  upon  which  thc}^  are  intended  to  be 
used,  are  marked  for  the  kind  of  piece  to  which  they 
belong.  The  graduations  on  the  scale  are  the  tangents 
of  each  quarter  of  a  degree  to  a  radius  equal  to  the 
distance  between  the  muzzle  sight  and  the  centre  of 
the  journal-notches,  which  are,  in  all  cases,  one  inch 
in  rear  of  the  base  ring. 

The  hausse,  when  not  in  use,  is  carrie<l  by  the  gun- 
ner in  a  leather  pouch,  suspended  from  a  shouldor- 
sk'ap. 


58  SCHOOL    OK    THK    BATTKRY. 


Part   S  e  c  o  n  b  . 
SCirOOJ;  OF  THE  BATTKRY 


Article  I. 

GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 

The  manoeuvres  of  a  field  batteiy  are  intended  to 
furnish  the  instruction  required  for  conducting  its 
movements  aud  formations  in  all  situations  in  which 
it  can  be  employed. 

The  movements  are  described  for  one  flank  only. 
They  may  be  executed  by  the  other  flank  according 
to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

The  battery  of  manoeuvre  is  divided  into  sections, 
each  being  composed  of  two  pieces  and  two  caissons. 
The  column  of  sections  is  not  onlj^  found  to  be  sufli- 
cient  for  the  purpose  of  manoeuvre,  but  much  more 
convenient  tiian  the  column  of  pieces  or  half-batteries. 
The  column  of  pieces  requires  too  great  an  extension 
of  the  battery,  and  too  much  time  for  its  evolutions. 
In  the  column  of  half-batteries  one  chief  of  section  is 
deprived  of  his  command;  and,  when  formed  at  full 
distance,  the  depth  of  the  column  is  essentiall}'  the 
same  as  that  of  sections.  Moreover,  when  this  column 
is  nsed  for  man(jeuvre,  the  pieces  of  the  same  section 
can  not  be  kept  long  together  in  any  ];)art  of  the  bat- 
tery.  These  objections  to  the  column  of  half-batter- 
ies do  not,  however,  apply  to  the  eight-gun  battery, 
which  can   be  manoeuvred   by  half-batteries   without 


th. 


.SOIIOOl-    OF    Tlir;    FiATTKRV.  59. 

deprivini]^  a  chief  of  section  of  Iiis  command,  or  sep- 
arating the  pieces  of  the  same  section.  Habitually, 
this  battery  will  be  manoeuvred  by  sections,  but  when 
necessary,  or  expedient,  it  may  be  man(xuivre<i  by  half- 
batteries. 

Each  piece  and  its  caisson  arc  kept  in  a  fixed  rela- 
tion to  each  other,  and  may  be  said  to  constitute  a 
unit.  They  are  separated  only  in  the  formations  in 
battery.  This  principle  simplifies  the  manoeuvres 
greatly,  and  renders  it  generally  unnecessary  to  give 
separate  commands  to  the  caissons. 

No  notice  is  taken  of  inversions  in  any  of  the  orders, 
either  in  column,  in  line,  oi*  in  batteiy.  The  most 
simple  and  rapid  formations  are  always  adopted. 

The  passage  of  cai-riages  is  used  as  an  elementary 
principle  in  the  manoeuvres.  Jn  the  formations  in  bat- 
tery it  is  indispensable  for  changing  the  front  of  a 
line;  and  when  executed  seasonably,  as  a  preparatory 
movement,  it  greatly  facilitates  all  the  formations. 
It  may  be  executed  with  the  same,  or  an  increased 
gait. 

But  one  wheel  is  admitted.  The  j)ivot  carriage 
preserves  its  gait,  while  the  others  regulate  theirs 
according  to  their  distances  from  it;  the  guide  being 
always  on  the  pivot  flank. 

No  general  or  special  guides  are  used.  The  chiefs 
of  pieces  are  the  guides  of  the  carriages  to  which  they 
,.  are  attached.  And  each  becomes  the  guide  of  the  line 
or  column  wdienever  his  carriage  occupies  the  posi- 
tion to  which  the  movements  are  referred. 

The  cautionary  command  Attention  is  not  embraced 
among  those  required  \\)v  the  manoeuvres,  l)ut  may  be 
used  at  the  discretion  of  the  captain.  The  commands 
of  the  chiefs  of  sections  are  more  iiuinorous,  and  those 


60  SCHOOL    OK    THE    BATTERY. 

of  the  captain  arc  more  frcMjucntlj'  repeated,  than  in 
otljer  arms  of  service,  on  account  of  tlio  noise  of  car- 
riages and  extent  of  command. 

As  a  general  rule,  the  cannoneers  sliould  mount  the 
ammunition  chests  only  for  rapid  movements;  and 
when  within  range  of  the  enemy's  guns  they  should 
dismount,  unless  important  considerations  require  a 
continuation  of  the  rapid  gait  The  explosion  of  a 
caisson  when  the  cannoneers  arc  mounted  might  de- 
stro}^  many  men. 

Two  methods  have  been  adopted  for  the  formations 
in  battery  to  the  front:  one  requiring  the  pieces  to 
be  thrown  forward,  the  other  requiring  the  caissons 
to  be  thrown  to  the  rear.  The  first  method  is  equally 
adapted  to  light  and  heavy  batteries.  By  this  method 
the  pieces  and  caissons  are  rapidly  separated;  and  the 
commands  may  be  given  while  the  battery  is  moving, 
so  as  to  leave  the  caissons  at  their  pro])er  distance 
in  rear  of  the  line  on  which  the  pieces  are  to  form. 
The  second  method  is  not  adapted  to  heavy  batteries, 
on  account  of  the  difficulty  of  turning  the  pieces  about 
by  hand.  But  with  light  pieces  it  is  advantageous 
when  the  battery  is  already  formed  upon  the  line  of 
battle,  or  when  the  head  of  the  column  which  is  to  be 
formed  into  battery  is  very  near  that  line. 

C03J  POSITION    OF    THE    BaTTERY    OF    MANOEUVRE. 

The  Battery  of  Moiwuvre  is  composed  of  six  field 
pieces  and  six  caissons,  properly-  manned,  horsed,  and 
equipped.  It  is  sometimes  reduced  to  four,  or  in- 
creased to  eight  pieces.  The  tactics  are  adapted  to 
either  number,  but  six  pieces  are  supposed. 

Each  carriage  is  drawn  by  four  or  six  horses,  and 
the  officers  and  men  are  as  follows: 


/ 


SCHOOL    or    THE    iiATTEllY.  61 

One  captjiiu,  who  coiniiuiiuls  the  battery. 

Three  liciitensints,  each  conunanding  a  section;  the 
section  of  the  junior  lieutenant  should  be  in  the  centre. 

One  lieutenant,  commanding  the  line  of  caissons. 

When  half- batteries  are  formed,  they  arc  com- 
manded by  the  two  lieutenants  highest  in  rank. 

Six  mounted  sergeants,  each  charged  with  guiding 
and  superintending  a  piece. 

Twenty-four  or  thirty-six  drivers,  being  one  to  each 
pair  of  horses. 

Six  detachments  of  cannoneers,  each  containing  nine 
men.  This  number  includes  two  corporals,  one  of 
whom  is  chief  of  the  caisson ;  and  the  other,  the 
gunner,  has  charge  of  the  gun  and  its  detachment. 

Two  trumpeters  or  buglers. 

()nc  guidon. 

The  battery  is  divided  into  three  sections,  denomi- 
nated the  right,  left,  and  centre  sections.  Should 
there  be  four  sections,  they  are  denominated  the 
right,  right-centre,  left-centre,  and  left  sections.  A  sec- 
tion contains  two  pieces  and  two  caissons,  and  in 
each  section  the  pieces  are  denominated  right  piece 
and  left  piece. 

The  battery  is  also  divided  into  half-batteries,  de- 
nominated right  half-battery  and  left  half-battery . 

The  word  p)iece  applies  to  the  gun  or  howitzer, 
either  with  or  without  its  limber;  and  sometimes  to 
the  piece  and  caisson  together. 

-'  The /ro?if  of  a  battery,  in  the  order  in  battery,  is  the 
front  of  the  line  of  ])ieces.  In  all  other  formations 
it  is  the  front  of  the  first  line  of  drivers. 

The  right  or  left  of  a  battery  is  alwa^'s  that  of  the 
actual  front,  whetiier  the  pieces  or  caissons  lead. 

The  interval  is  a  space  measured  ])arallel  to  the 
front. 


02  .SCHOOL  OF  Tin-:  battkhy. 

The  distance  is  a  8p;icc  measured  in  cle})Ui,  or  per- 
pendicuhir  to  the  front. 

Tlie  measures  of  intervals  and  distances  are  given 
in  vards,  and  express  the  vacant  spaces  between  the 
coni]K)nent  parts  of  tlie  battery. 

Fi(iURE  22.  Tlie  object  of  a  rigid  or  left  wheel  is  to 
give  the  carriage  a  direction  perpendicular  to  the  one 
it  liad  l>eforc.  In  executing  it,  the  leading  horse  on 
the  jiivot  flank  describes  a  quadrant  (five  yards)  of  a 
circle  wliosc  i-adins  is  o.25  yards,  and  then  resumes 
the  direct  march.  The  horse  coupled  to  him  increases 
his  gait  and  conforms  to  Jiis  movement,  resuming  the 
direct  march  at  the  same  time.  The  centre  vCud 
wheel  horses  follow  in  the  tracks  of  their  leaders. 

Fic^URE  28.  The  object  of  a.  right  or  left  oblique  is  to 
give  the  carriage  a  direction  inclined  45°  to  the  right 
or  left  of  the  one  it  had  befoi-e.  In  executing  it,  the 
leading  horse  on  the  pivot  flank  describes  the  eighth 
of  a  circle,  whose  radius  is  3.25  yards,  and  then 
resumes  the  dii^^ct  march.  The  horse  coupled  to  him 
inci'cascs  his  gait,  conforms  to  his  movement,  and 
resumes  the  direct  n^arch  at  the  same  time.  The 
other  horses  follow  in  the  tracks  of  their  leaders. 
The  oblique  of  a  carriage  is  in  fact  one-half  of  a 
right  or  left  wheel. 

Figure  24.  The  passage  jipplies  to  two  carriages  in 
flle,  and  its  object  is  to  pass  the  rear  carriage  to  the 
fi'ont.  To  execute  it,  the  rear  carriage  inclines  to  the 
right,  passes  the  one  in  front,  and  takes  its  proper 
distance  in  front  by  inclining  to  the  left.  The  recip- 
rocal gaits  of  the  carriages  are  regulated  by  com- 
mands. 

Figure  25.  The  object  of  an  about  is  to  establish 
the  carriage  on  the  same  ground,  but  in  the  opposite 


schooIj  of  the  battery.  Go^ 

direction,  liaving  tlic  heads  of  the  Jcading  horses 
where  tlio  hinder  part  of  the  carriage  \vaf5  befoi'c. 
For  the  eaRv  exec'ution  of  tiiis  movement  at  all  gaits, 
an.d*-witl\  a  carriage  of  four  Avheels,  all  the  horses 
incline  at  once  to  the  riglit  as  they  advance,  and 
so  move,  according  to  their  distances  from  the  pole,  as 
not  to  interfere  with  the  wheel-liorses,  which  really 
govern  tiie  carriage. 

FiQUKE  2G.  The  countermarch  applies  to  two  car- 
riages of  dilferent  kinds  in  iilo.  Its  object  is  to  make 
thein  both  perform  the  about,  and  to  establish  them  on 
the  ground  they  occupied  before,  but  in  the  opposite 
direction  and  with  the  same  carriage  in  front.  In 
performing  it  the  carriage  of  the  front  rank  executes 
an  about  at  once,  and  moves  to  the  ])!ace  Avhich  was 
occupied  by  the  other  carriage.  The  latter  follows 
the  track  of  the  former,  executes  the  about  on  the 
same  ground,  aud  takes  its  place. 
.  Note. — The  tracks  of  the  limber  wheels  are  indi- 
cated by  full  lines,  the  track  of  the  otf- leader  by 
broken  lines. 

Figure  27.  There  is  but  one  kind  of  wheel,  which 
is  that  with  a  moving  pivot.  The  carriage  on  the 
pivot  flank  wheels  in  such  a  manner  as  to  unmask 
the  ground  where  the  movement  commenced.  When 
the  wheel  is  made  with  a  section  front,  the  pivot  car- 
riage describes  a  quadrant  [five  yards;  of  a  circle 
whose  radius  is  H.25.  With  a  battery  front  the  pivot 
carriage  describes  a  quadrant  (tiocnty-tico  yards)  of  a 
circle  whose  radius  m  fourteen.  If  the  wheel  be  order- 
ed from  a  halt,  the  pivot  carringe  moves  at  a  walk;  if 
on  the  march,  it  preserves  its  gait.  In  all  cases  the 
marching  wing  regulates  its  gait  in  such  a  manner  as 
to   remain    the   nhortest   possible    time   in  rear  of  the 


,64  SCHOOL    OF    TOE    BATTERY. 

line,  without  urging  the  horses  unnecessarily.  In  all 
wheels  the  guide  is  on  the  pivot  flank,  and  the  inter- 
vals are  preserved  from  that  flank.  The  chiefs  of 
pieces  act  as  guides,  marching  for  that  purpose  J#ith 
the  leading  carriao-es. 

The  alignment  is  made  on  the  drivers  of  the  wheel- 
horses,  except  in  hatter}',  when  it  is  made  on  the  hind 
wheels. 

In  giving  commands  the  strength  of  the  voice 
should  be  proportioned  to  the  length  of  the  line. 
When  a  chief  of  section  does  not  hoar  the  commands, 
he  regulates  his  movement  by  what  he  sees  executed 
by  an  adjoining  chief.  The  command  Attention  is 
given  by  the  captain  at  the  commencement  and  at 
each  renewal  of  the  exercise;  but  afterward  it  is 
given  only  when  he  thinks  it  necessary  to  fix  atten- 
tion. 

Formations  of  the  Battery. 

The  three  following  orders  constitute  the  different 
formations  of  the  battery  of  manoiuvre  : 

1.  Order  in  column.     2.  Order  in  line.     3.  Order 

IN  battery. 

Order  in  Column. 

Figure  28.  The  order  in  column  is  that  in  which  the 
battery  is  formed  by  sections;  the  carriages  being  in 
two  files,  and'  each  piece  being  followed  or  preceded 
b}''  its  caisson. 

The  captain  is  generally  fourteen  yards  from  the 
column  and   opposite  to  its  centre.     But  during  the 
manceuvres  he  moves  wherever  his  presence  may  be 
most  necessary,  and  where  his  commands  may  be  best 
heard. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTERY.  (35 

Each  chief  of  section  is  in  line  with  his  lcadin<r 
drivers,  and  midway  between  his  leading  carriages. 

The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  is  in  line  with  the 
captain,  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  column,  and  four 
yards  from  it.  But  he  does  not  change  his  position  to 
conform  to  that  of  the  captain. 

Each  chief  of  piece  is  on  the  left,  and  near  the  lead- 
ing driver  of  his  leading  carriage. 

The  trumpeters  are  near  tlic  captain. 

The  guidon  is  liabitualh^  next  the  chief  of  the  lead- 
ing piece,  or  guide  of  the  leading  section,  but  takes 
post  wherever  the  captain  may  direct. 

Ordek  in  Line. 

Fkjure  29.  The  order  in  line  is  that  in  which  the 
carriages  are  formed  in  two  lines:  the  horses  all 
facing  in  the  same  direction,  the  pieces  limbered,  and 
each  followed  or  preceded  by  its  caisson. 

The  captain  is  generally  four  yards  in  front  of  the 
centre.  But  during  the  manc^euvres  he  goes  wherever 
his  presence  may  be  lifest  necessary,  and  wliere  his 
commands  may  be  best  heard. 

Each  chief  of  section  is  in  line  with  his  leading 
drivers,  and  midway  between  the  leading  carriages  of 
his  section. 

The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  is  opposite  the 
centre, /owr  yards  behind  the  rear  line  of  carriages. 

Each  chief  of  piece  is  in  the  same  position  as  in 
column. 

The  trumpeter,  when  he  does  not  accompany  the 
captain,  is  in  line  with  the  leading  drivers,  and  fovr 
yards  from  the  right  flank. 

The  guidon  is  on  the  left  of  the  trumpeter. 

The  interval  between  the  carriages  \^  fovrtccn  yards. 


66  SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTERY. 

The  distance  between  tlie  two  lines  is  two  yards. 
The  cannoneers  are  at  their  posts  as  in  column. 

Order  in  Battery. 

Figure  30.  The  order  in  battery  is  that  in  which  the 
pieces  are  prepared  for  firing:  the  pieces,  limbers,  and 
caissons  being  turned  toward  the  enemy,  and  formed 
in  tliree  parallel  lines. 

The  captain  is  generally  on  the  left  of  the  chief  of 
the  centre  section  ;  but  he  may  go  wherever  his  pres- 
ence is  required. 

Each  chief  of  section  is  habitually  in  tlie  centre  of 
his  section,  half-way  between  the  lines  of  pieces  and 
limbers, 

The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  is  opposite  the 
centre, /owr  yards  in  rear  of  the  line  of  caissons. 

Each  chief  of  piece  is  outside  the  file  on  the  left  of 
his  piece,  but  near  it,  and  opposite  the  middle  of  the 
trail  handspike.  During  the  real  execution  of  the 
firings  he  habitually  dismounts,  and  gives  the  reins  of 
his  horse  to  the  driver  of  the^dieel-horses  of  the  lim- 
ber,  and  takes  his  place  on  the  right  or  left  of  the 
piece,  in  such  position  as  will  best  enable  him  to  ob- 
serve the  eftect  of  the  shot. 

Bach  chief  of  caisson  is  on  the  left,  and  four  yards 
iu  rear  of  the  Umber  of  the  piece. 

The  trumpeters  are  near  the  captain.  The  guidon 
is  on  the  flank  of  tlie  line  of  caissons. 

The  interval  between  the  pieces  \^  fourteen  yards. 

The  distance  between  the  lines  of  pieces  and  lim- 
bers is  six  yards,  measuring  from  the  end  of  the 
handsjDike  to  the  heads  of  the  leading  horses. 

The  distance  between  the  lines  of  limbers  and  cais- 
sons is  eleven  yards,  measuring  from  the  rear  of  the 


SCHOOL    OP    THE    BATTERY.  67 

limber^  to  the  heads  of  the  leading  horses  of  the 
caissons. 

The  cannoneers  are  at  their  posts. 

When  the  battery  retires  firing,  the  horses  and 
drivers  remain  faced  to  the  rear,  after  the  first  ret- 
I'Ograde  movement,  that  they  may  be  ready  to  con- 
tinue it. 


IvEMARKS    ON    THE    FORMATIONS    OF    THE    BaTTERY. 

During  the  mancjeuvres  the  captain  is  followed  by 
the  trumpeters,  who  must  not  leave  him.  On  receiv- 
ing an  order  from  the  captain  for  that  purpose,  they 
take  the  places  assigned  them  in  the  order  in  line. 

The  guidon  takes  the  place  assigned  him  in  the 
order  in  column,  in  line,  or  in  battery,  unless  otherwise 
instructed  by  the  captain,  who  directs  him  to  take 
such  position  as  he  may  think  necessary. 

The  double  column  is  a  particular  case  of  formation 
in  column  with  a  front  of  two  pieces.  It  is  formed  on 
the  centre  section  as  head  of  the  column;  each  of  the 
other  sections  being  in  column  of  pieces  in  rear.  When 
the  battery  contains  four  or  eight  pieces,  the  double 
column  is  formed  upon  the  two  central  pieces  as 
before. 

Measures  of  the  Elements  Composing  a  Battery, 
AND  OF  ITS  Formations, 

The  measures  given  in  the  three  orders  of  the  bat- 
tery, and  those  which  will  be  given  hereafter,  result 
from  the  dimensions  of  the  different  elements  em- 
braced. Those  dimensions  are  given  in  the  following 
table : 


68  SCHOOL    OF    TlIE    BATTERY. 

BEVtn-j/ds.     YRom'-ydn- 

Pieces  drawn  by  six  horses...- 14  2 

Caisson  drawn  by  six  horses 14  2 

Limber  drawn  by  six  horses H  2 

Piece  in  battery  with  handspike 5  2 

Column    of  sections '94  18 

Line  of  battle 30  82 

Line  in  battery 47  82 

Section  in  line 30  18 

Section  in  battery • 47  18 

Manning  the  Battery. 

The  gun-detiichments  and  teams,  having  been  pro})- 
erly  told  off,  are  marched  to  the  park  witli  the  teams 
in  front. 

The  chiefs  of  pieces  and  caissons,  when  mounted, 
march  with  the  teams.  The  whole  are  conducted  to 
the  battery,  the  teams  hitched,  and  detachments  post- 
ed, as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  section. 

As  soon  as  the  teams  are  hitched  and  cannoneers 
posted,  a  minute  inspection  is  made  by  the  chiefs  of 
pieces,  who  report  to  the  chiefs  of  sections,  and  a 
similar  inspection  is  made  by  the  chiefs  of  sections, 
who  report  to  the  captain. 

The  officers,  after  reporting,  will  draw  their-  sabres 
without  waiting  for  a  command  to  that  effect.  The 
chiefs  of  pieces  will  draw  theirs  on  an  intimation  from 
the  captain. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    BATTERY.  09 


Article  11. 

MOVEMENTS     IN     COLUMN. 

To  Unpark. 

Everything  being  prepared  for  manoeuvring,  if  the 
captain  wishes  to  unpark  by  the  right,  he  commandB: 

1.    By  iiiece — -from  the  right — front  into  column. 
2.  March. 

At  the  command  March,  the  right  2)iecc,  fblh:>wed 
by  its  caisson,  marches  direct  to  the  front,  and  the 
captain  indicates  the  direction  it  should  take.  The 
other  pieces  and  caissons  foHow  the  movement  of  the 
riglit  piece,  eacli  so  reguhiting  its  march  by  tliat 
which  precedes  it  as  to  march  in  the  same  direction 
and  tivo  yards  behind.  Each  chief  of  section  directs 
the  march  of  his  cari-iages,  which  are  so  conducted 
by  their  cliiefs  as  to  enter. the  eoiumn  by  the  most 
simple  movement.  The  column  of  pieces  is  thus 
formed  with  a  distance  of  two  _yards  between  the 
carriages. 

The  captain  goes  wherever  his  duty  may  require, 
but  generally  remains  on  the  left  flank,  opposite  tlie 
centre  of  the  column. 

The  chief  of  the  leading  section  places  himself 
near  the  chief  of  the  leading  piece,  and  on  his  left; 
the  other  chiefs  of  sections  four  yards  from  the  left 
flank,  abreast  the  centres  of  their  respective  sections. 

The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  is  opposite  the 
centre  of  the  column,  and  /owr  yards  from  the  right 
Hank. 


70  SCHOOL    OF    rilE    IJATTERY. 

Each  chief  of  piece  imd  caisson,  when  mounted,  is 
near  liis  leading  driver  on  the  left. 

The  trumpeters  are  near  the  captain. 

The  guidon  is  near  the  chief  of  the  leading  piece, 
on  his  left. 

When  tlie  battery  is  parked  with  the  caissons  in 
front,  the  captain  causes  it  to  unpark  by  the  right  by 
the  same  commands;  the  movements  being  executed 
in  the  same  manner. 

The  battery  may  be  unparked  by  the  left  according 
to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

To  Halt. 

To  halt  the  battery,  when  marching  in  column  of 
pieces,  the  captain  commands  : 

1..   Column.     2.  Halt. 

At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of 
sections,  all  the  carriages  are  immediately  halted. 

Change  of  Gait. 

The  changes  of  gait,  in  column  of  pieces,  are  exe- 
cuted by  the  following  commands  from  the  captain  : 
To  pass  from  the  walk  to  a  trot : 

1.   Trot.     2.  March. 

To  pass  i'rom  the  trot  to  a  walk  : 

1.    Walk.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of 
sections,  all  the  drivers  and  others  on  horseback  pre- 
pare to  change  tlie  gait;  and  at  the  second,  repeated 
in  like  manner,  they  pass  at  once  to  the  gait  indicated 
by  the  first  command. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    IJAT'JEllY.  /  1 

To  Form  Sections. 

Wlicii  tlic  buttery  is  marching  at  a  walk  in  column 
of  pieces,  to  form  sections  at  the  same  gait  by  gaining 
ground  to  the  left,  the  captain  commands : 

].  Form   sections — left  oblique.      2.  March,     o.   Guide 

right. 

h^'iGURE  ol.  The  chief  of  the  leading  section  com- 
mands Form  section — left  oblique  —  March — Guide 
right  in  succession  after  the  captain. 

At  the  command  Mahch,  the  iirst  two  carriages, 
piece  and  caisson,  advance  five  yards  and  halt.  The 
two  rear  carriages  oblique  to  the  left,  gain  their  inter- 
vals of  fourteen  yards,  then  niove  forward  and  place 
themselves  abreast  and  on  a  line  with  the  other  two, 
dressina:  to  tbe  I'io-ht. 

The  chief  of  the  section  takes  his  place  midway 
between  the  leading  carriages,  and  on  a  line  with  the 
lead  drivers. 

The  other  sections  continue  to  mai'ch  in  column  of 
pieces,  and  are  formed  successively  by  their  chiefs; 
each  commanding  F)rjn  section — left  oblique  in  time 
to  command  March  when  the  leading  carriage  of  his 
section  has  arrived  within  five  yards  of  its  distance. 
The  chief  of  section  then  commands:   Guide  right. 

When  the  column  of  pieces  is  marching  at  a  trot, 
the  formation  is  executed  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples and  by  the  same  commands.  But  the  leading 
carriages,  instead  of  advancing  /i^d  yards  and  halting 
as  before,  pass  to  a  walk  as  soon  as  the  command 
Makch  is  repeated  by  the  chief  of  section.  The 
other  sections  continue  to  march  at  a  trot,  and  exe- 
cute the  movement  at  that  gait,  the  two  leading 
carriages   of  each   section   i)assing   to  a   walk   at  the 


lA  SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTEllV. 

command  March,  which  must  be  given  when  they 
have  closed  to  their  proper  distance. 

When  the  column  of  pieces  is  at  a  halt,  the  forma- 
tion is  executed  as  prescribed  for  the  column  at  a 
walk.  In  this  case  the  carriages  all  move  at  the  com- 
mand March,  and  the  leading  ones  halt  after  advan- 
cing j^i;e  yards. 

When  the  column  of  pieces  is  marching  at  a  walk, 
to  form  sections  at  a  trot,  gaining  ground  to  the  left, 
the  captain  commands: 

1.  Form  sections — left  oblique — trot.     2.  March. 
3.   Guide  right. 

The  chief  of  the  leading  section  repeats  the  com- 
mands Form  section  —  left  oblique  —  trot — March  — 
Guide  right  in  succession  after  the  captain. 

At  the  first  command  the  chiefs  of  the  other  sec- 
tions command  Trot ;  and  at  the  second,  wh.icli"  they 
repeat,  their  sections  commence  the  trot. 

The  chiefs  of  the  second  and  third  sections  com- 
mand Form  section — le.ft  oblique  \w  time  to  command 
March  when  the  leading  carriage  of  each  section  has 
nearly  gained  its  distance.  Tiie  leading  carriage  then 
resumes  the  walk,  and  the  chief  of  section  commands 
Guide  right. 

The  chiefs  of  sections  superintend  their  carriages, 
and  take  the  posts  assigned  them  in  the  order  in 
colunin  as  soon  as  their  sections  are  formed. 

Sections  are  formed  by  gaining  ground  to  the  right 
according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse 
means.  The  commands  iiVQ>:,Form  sections  —  right 
oblique —  March —  Guide  left;  ov.Form  sections — right 
ue — trot — March — Guide  left. 


school  of  the  battery.  73 

The  Battery  being  in  Column  of  Pieces,  to  form 
THE  Caissons  on  the  Flank. 

When  the  battery  is  in  column  of  pieces  with  the 
caissons  in  rear,  to  form  the  pieces  and  caissons  into 
separate  cohimns,  as  in  the  flank  march  of  a  battery 
in  line,  tlie  captain  commands  : 

1.   Caissons  left  (or  Caissons  left — trot).     2.  March. 
3.  Guide  right. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tions, the  caissons  oblique  at  once  to  the  left,  gain  the 
interval  of  fourteen  yards,  and  place  themselves  oppo- 
site their  pieces;  the  pieces  closing  upon  each  other 
at  the  same  time  to  the  usual  distance.  The  gait  is 
regulated  as  in  the  formation  of  sections;  and  when 
the  movement  is  performed  at  a  walk,  the  leading 
carriage  halts  after  advancing  its  own  length. 

The  chiefs  of  sections  take  their  places  as  in  column 
of  sections. 

The  caissons  are  formed  on  the  rio-ht  according;  to 
the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

When  the  pieces  are  in  rear,  they  are  formed  on  the 
right  or  left  of  their  caissons  in  the  same  manner^  and 
by  corresponding  commands. 

To  March  in  Column. 

The  battery  being  in  column  at  a  halt,  to  advance, 
the  captain  commands : 

1.   Column — forward.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  left  (or 

right). 

The  commands  forward  —  March — Guide  left  (or 
right)  are  repeated  l:>y  the  chiefs  of  scctio^ijs.     At  the 

7 


7.4  SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTERY. 

command  March,  all  the  carriagcB  advance,  the  guide 
maintains  the  direction,  and  the  carriages,  as  well  as 
the  detachments  of  horse  cannoneers,  preserve  their 
intervals  and  distances. 

To  Halt  the  Column. 

The  captain  commands  : 

1.   Column-     2.  Halt. 

At  the  first  command  the  driver  gathers  his  horses; 
at  the  second  he  halts. 

To  resume  the  march  in  column,  the  commands  are  : 

1.   Column fonvard.     2.  March. 

To  Change  the  Gait. 
To  trot,  the  captain  commands : 

i.   Trot.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command  the  driver  gathers  his  horses. 
At  the  command  March,  he  takes  the  trot  gradually, 
using  for  the  near  horse  the  legs  and  bridle  hand,  at 
the  same  time  advancing  the  coupling  rein  with  the 
right  hand.  If  the  off-horse  does  not  obey  this,  the 
whip  may  be  threatened,  and,  if  necessary,  used. 
When  the  horse  obeys,  replace  the  hand. 

At  the  command  Trot  out  —  March,  the  horses  are 
urged  to  a  rapid  trot,  and  the  gait 'maintained  if  nec- 
essary by  the  whip  and  spur. 

At  the  command  Gallop — March,  they  are  urged  to 
the  gallop,  which  gait  is  maintained  nntil  ordered  to 
be  changed. 

To  pass  from  the  gallop  to  the  trot,  the  commands 
are : 

Trot — March. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTERY.  75 

To  pass  from  the  trot  out  to  the  trot,  the  commands 
are : 

Slow  trot — March. 

To  pass  to  a  walk,  the  commands  are : 

Walk— March. 

To  move  at  the  rapid  gaits  from  a  halt,  the  com- 
mands Trot,  etc.,  should  be  added  to  the  first  com- 
mands, so  as  to  immediately  precede  those  of  execu- 
tion.    All  changes  of  gait  should  he  made  gradually. 

To  March  by  a  Plank. 

The  battery  being  in  colunin,  in  march,  or  at  a  halt, 
to  gain  ground  to  the  left,  the  captain  commands: 

1.   Column — by  the  left  flank.     2.  March. 

Figure  32.  The  commands  By  the  left  flank — March 
are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections.  At  the  com- 
mand March,  each  carriage  wheels  at  once  to  the  left, 
and,  when  the  wheel  is  pretty  nearly  completed,  the 
captain  commands : 

1.  Forward.     2.   Guide  right. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tions. At  the  command  Forward,  all  the  carriages 
march  direct  to  the  front. 

The  line  is  regularly  established,  and  the  carriages 
aligned  in  each  rank,  with  their  distances  of  two  and 
intervals  oi  fourteen  yards.  The  chiefs  of  sections 
take  their  places  between  the  leading  carriages  as  in 
line. 

To  cause  the  battery  to  resume  its  original  direc- 
tion, the  captain  commands : 

1.  Battery  —  by  the  right  flank.     2.  March.    3.  For- 
ward.    4.   Guide  left. 


76  SCHOOl,   OF   THE    liATTERY. 

The  commands  By  the  right  Hank  — ^l^i^cii  —  FoR- 
WAED — Guide  left  arc  repeated  and  executed  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  before  described. 

After  the  flank  march,  to  march  the  battery  in  a 
direction  opposite  to  the  original  one,  the  captain 
commands : 

I.  Battery— bij  the  left  flank.     2.  March.     3.  Forward. 
4.   Guide  right. 

Oblique  March. 

The  battery  being  in  colLnnn,  in  march,  or  at  a  halt, 
to  cause  it  to  march  obliquely,  to  gain  ground  to  the 
front  and  left,  the  captain  commands  : 

\.  Column — left  oblique.     2.  March. 

Figure  83.  The  chiefs  of  sections  repeat  the  com- 
mands X-e/if  oblique — March  after  the  captain. 

A1  the  command  March,  all  the  carriages  oblique 
at  once  to  the  left,  and  march  in  the  new  direction, 
moving  in  parallel  lines,  and  preserving  their  inter- 
vals. 

In  obliquing,  the  heads  of  the  horses  in  each  rank 
are  on  a  line  parallel  to  the  original  front.  The  in- 
terval is  fourteen  yards,  measured  parallel  to  the  front, 
and  ten  yards  if  measured  on  a  line  ])erpendicular  to 
the  oblique  direction.  In  mounted  batteries,  each 
carriage  of  the  right  file  marches  in  the  prolonga- 
tion of  the  left  carriage  of  the  rank  which  precedes 
its  own,  and  at  a  distance  of  nine  yards. 

The  chief  of  section  conforms  his  movements  to 
those  of  the  section,  and  preserves  his  relative  posi- 
tion. 

The  guide  of  the  leading  section  is  the  guide  of  the 
column. 


SCHOOL   OP   THE   HATTERY.  77 

Tho  officers  conform  to  the  movement,  and  preserve 
their  rcJative  positions. 

To  resume  the  original  direction,  the  captain  com- 
mauds: 

Forward. 

This  command  is  repeated  by  tlie  chiefs  of  sections, 
and  the  carriages  resume  the  original  direction  by 
obliquing  to  the  right. 

If  the  captain  wishes  to  halt  the  column  for  the 
purpose  of  rectifying  its  alignments,  intervals,  or  ob- 
liquity, he  commands:' 

1.   Column.     2.  Halt. 

And  to  resume  the  march  in  the  oblique  direction: 

1.   Column.     2.  March. 

The  commands  Halt  —  March  are  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  sections. 

Passage  of  Carriages  in  Column. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  column,  to  change 
the  relative  positions  of  tlie  front  and  rear  ranks, 
without  altering  the  gait,  the  captain  commands: 

^1.  Pieces,  pass  your  eaissojis  (or   Caissons,  pass   your 
pieces).     2.  March. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tions; and  at  the  command  March,  the  leading  car- 
riage of  each  piece  halts.  The  rear  carriage  inclines 
to  the  right,  passes  it,  takes  the  proper  distance  in 
front  b}^  inclining  to  the  left,  and  halts.  The  chief  of 
the  piece  joins  it  as  it  passes.  To  continue  the  march 
without  halting  the  carriages  which  have  pdssed,  the 
instructor  commands  Forward  when  the  passage  is 
nearly  completed. 


78  SCHOOL   OF   THE    BATTERY. 

To  continue  the  march  without  halting  the  car- 
riages of  the  rear  rank,  the  captain  commands :  For- 
ward when  the  passage  is  nearly  completed,  and  the 
command  is  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  section. 

When  the  column  is  marching  at  a  trot,  the  passage 
is  executed  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by 
the  same  commands,  except  that  the  carriages  of  the 
front  rank  move  at  a  walk  instead  of  halting  at  the 
command  March.  The  carriages  of  the  rear  rank 
execute  the  passage  at  a  trot,  and  then  change  the 
gait  to  a  walk. 

When  the  column  is  at  a  halt,  the  passage  is  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  the 
same  commands.  If  the  captain  wishes  to  put  the 
column  in  march  immediately  after  the  movement, 
he  commands:  Forward  when  the  passage  is  about 
being  completec^,  and  then  Guide  left  (or  right).  Those 
commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections. 

When  the  column  is  marching  at  a  walk,  to  execute 
the  passage  at  a  trot,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Fieces,  pass  your  caissons  —  trot  (or  Caissons,  pass 
your  pieces — trot).     2.  March. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tions. At  the  command  March  the  carriages  of  the 
front  rank  in  each  section  continue  to  march  at  a 
walk.  Those  of  the  rear  rank  execute  the  passage  at 
a  trot,  and  resume  the  walk  as  soon  as  the  passage  is 
completed. 

About  in  Column. 

The  battery  being  in  column,  in  march,  or  at  a  halt, 
to  face  it  to  the  rear,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  Pieces  and  caissoiis — left  about.     2.  March. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    BATTERY.  79^ 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tions; and  at  the  second  all  the  carriages  execute  the 
about.  When  the  movement  is  about  being  com- 
pleted, the  captain  commands:  Column  —  Halt;  or 
Forward — Guide  right  (or  left):  the  commands  Halt, 
or  Forward — Gruide  right  (or  left)  are  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  sections. 

Countermarch  in  Column. 

The  battery  being  in  column,  in  inarch,  or  at  a  halt, 
to  execute  the  countermarch  in  each  section,  the  cap- 
tain commands  : 

1.   Countermarch.     2.  March. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tions, and  at  the  second  each  piece  and  its  caisson 
execute  the  countermarch.  When  the  movement  is 
about  being  completed,  the  captain  commands:  Col- 
umn— Halt;  or  Forward  —  Guide  right  (or  left). 

These  commands  are  repeated  as  in  the  preceding 
paragraph. 

To  Change  Direction  in  Column. 

The  battery  being  in  column,  in  march,  or  at  a  halt, 
to  cause  it  to  change  direction  to  the  left,  the  captain 
commands : 

Head  of  column  to  the  left. 

Figure  34.  The  chief  of  the  leading  section  com- 
mands:  Left  wheel  —  March;  and  afterward  For- 
ward. 

At  the  command  March,  the  pivot  carriage  exe- 
cutes the  wheel  without  changing  the  gait,  the  car- 
riage on  the  wheeling  flank  wheels  in  such  manner  as 


80  'school  of  the  uattery. 

to  conform  to  its  movements,  increasing  the  gait,  and 
preserving  the  intervals.  At  the  command  Forward, 
which  is  given  as  soon  as  it  is  in  the  new  direction, 
the  pivot  carriage  moves  direct  to  the  front;  the  other 
resumes  its  original  gait  after  completing  the  wheel 
and  arriving  npon  the  same  line.  The  carriages  of 
the  rear  rank  preserve  tlieir  distances,  and  follow 
those  of  the  front  rank. 

Each  of  the  other  sections,  on  arriving  at  the  point 
where  the  first  wheeled,  executes  the  same  movement, 
and  b}^  the  same  commands  from  its  chief 

Each  chief  of  section  must  give  the  command  Left 
wheel  in  time  to  command  March  when  the  heads  of 
his  leaders  are  three  and  a  quarter  j^vd^  from  the 
wheeling  point.  And  the  command  Forward  must 
be  given  as  soon  as  the  leading  pivot  carriage  has 
entered  the  new  direction. 

The  change  of  direction   to   the  right  is  executed 
according   to    the    same   principles,    and    by    inverse 
means.  _ 

An  oblique  change  of  direction  is  executed  accord- 
ing to  the  same  principles  by  the  command  : 

Head  of  column — left  (or  rujht)  half-wheel 

The  chiefs  of  sections  command  successively :  Left 
(or  right)  half -wheel  —  March  —  Forward;  the  com- 
mand Forward  being*  given,  in  tliis  case,  when  the 
leading  pivot  carriage  of  each  section  is  about  finish- 
ing the  left  or  right  oblique. 

To  Diminish  the  Front  of  a  Column  on  the  March. 

The  battery  marching  at  a  walk  in  column  of  sec- 
tions, to  form  column  of  pieces  from  the  right,  at  that 
gait,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  By  the  right — break  sections,     2.  March. 


SCHOOL- OF  THE  r.ATTKin'.  SI 

Figure  35.  The  chief  of  the  leading  section  com- 
mands successively  after  the  captain  : 

By  the  right — break  section — March. 

At  the  command  March,  the  right  carriages  con- 
tinue to  move  forward  at  a  walk,  the  left  carriages 
obliquing  to  enter  the  column  in  their  rear. 

The  other  sections  are  broken  in  succession  by  the 
same  commands  from  their  chiefs;  the  command 
March  being  given  Avhen  the  wheel-horses  of  the  left 
carriages  of  the  next  preceding  section  enter  the 
right  oblique. 

The  battery  marching  at  a  walk  in  column  of  sec- 
tions, to  form  column  of  pieces  from  the  right  at  a 
trot,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  By  the  right — break  sections — trot.     2.  March. 

The  chief  of  the  leading  section  commands  succes- 
sively after  the  ca])tain  :  By  the  right — break  section — 
trot — March;  and  the  right  carriages  of  the  leading- 
section  move  forward  at  a  moderate  trot.  The  left 
carriages  of  the  same  section  commence  the  trot  on 
obliquing  to  enter  the  column. 

The  other  sections  are  broken  successively  by  the 
same  commands  from  their  chiefs;  and  the  carriages 
are  regulated  by  each  other,  as  in  breaking  sections 
at  a  walk. 

This  formation  is  executed  from  the  left  according 
to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

In   Column  with  the  Caissons  on  the  Flank,  to 
Replace  them  in  Front  or  Eear. 

The  battery  being  in  column,  with  the  caissons  on 
the  flank,  to  re-establish  them  in  rear  of  their  pieces, 
the  cai>tain  commands  : 


.S2  SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTERY. 

1.   Caissons,  rear  (or  Caissons,  rear — trot).     2.  March. 

Each  chief  of  section  repeats  the  commands  in  time 
to  command  March  when  the  leading  piece  of  his 
section  is  to  commence  the  movement. 

At  the  command  March,  the  piece  at  the  head  of 
the  cohimn  moves  forward  at  the  required  gait,  and 
its  caisson  places  itself  in  rear  by  an  oblique.  The 
other  pieces  move  forward  in  succession,  and  are  fol- 
lowed by  their  caissons  in  like  manner. 

All  the  carriages  preserve  the  usual  distances  in 
column'. 

This  movement  is  performed  at  the  different  gaits, 
and  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  break- 
ing sections. 

To  place  the  caissons  in  front  of  their  pieces,  the 
commands  are  : 

1.  Caissons,  front  (or  Caissons,  front — trot).    2.  March. 

The  caissons  oblique  successivel}"-,  and  take  their 
positions  at  ^z^*o  yards  distance  in  front  of  their  pieces, 
which  then  follow  their  movements. 

To  FoR.M  THE  Park. 

The  battery  being  in  column  of  pieces,  and  near  the 
ground  on  which  it  is  to  be  parked,  will  be  formed  by 
one  of  the  following  commands  : 

{  Forward  into  park — right  (or  left)  oblique. 
1.  At^yardsJ  rp^  ^^^^  j,.^^^  ^^^.  ^^^.^^  into  park, 
interval.      ^  g^^  ^j^^  ^..^^^  ^^^  ^^^.^^  into  park. 
2    March. 

To  form  forward  into  park.  The  column  apjjroaches 
the  park  from  the  rear,  the  leading  piece  being  in  rear 
of  the  ground  on  which  it  is  to  rest. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTERY.  83 

At  the  command  March,  the  leading  piece  marches 
direct  to  the  front,  and  halts  at  its  proper  pLace ;  all 
the  other  carriages  oblique  to  the  right  (or  left)  until 
near  their  places  in  park,  when  they  change  direction 
to  the  front  so  as  to  come  up  square  on  tlie  line. 
They  halt  a  little  in  rear  of  the  line,  and  dress  for- 
ward on  the  carriage  already  established. 

To  form  to  the  right  into  park.  The  captain,  ap- 
proaching the  park  by  its  right,  directs  the  cohimn 
parallel  to  tlie  front  nwd  forty  yards  behind  it.  At  the 
command  March,  which  is  given  when  the  leading 
l)iece  is  three  yards  from  the  point  opposite  the  posi- 
tion which  it  is  to  occupy,  the  chief  of  section  wheels 
it  to  the  right,  moves  it  forward,  and  halts  it  at  its 
position.  The  other  carnages  niove  straight  forward; 
each  one  wheels  to  the  right  when  three  yards  from 
the  point  0])posite  to  the  position  it  is  to  occiipj^  in 
park,  marches  forward,  and  places  itself  on  the  right 
of  and  in  line  with  those  already  established. 

To  form  to  the  left  into  park  is  executed  according  to 
the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

To  form  on  the  right  into  park.  The  captain,  ap- 
proaching the  park  by  its  right,  directs  the  column 
parallel  to  the  front  and  fortg  yards  in  rear. 

The  leading  piece  is  wheeled  to  the  right  and  estab- 
lished in  its  position  as  before;  the  next,  passing  in 
rear  of  it,  places  itself  in  line  on  its  left  in  like  man- 
ner, and  so  with  the  others. 

When  the  park  consists  of  two  or  more  lines,  the 
same  principles  are  observed;  each  carriage  of  the 
rear  ranks  follows  its  file-leader  in  its  movements. 

The  park  should  be  formed  on  the  left  according  to 
the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

Kach  chief  of  section  directs  the  march  of  carriages, 


.•^4  SCHOOL    OF    THE    HATTERY. 

and  each  carriage  is  conducted  to  its  place  in  park  by 
its  particular  chief.     When  the  nature  of  the  ground 
requires,  the  detachments  are  ordered  to  leave  their 
pieces  successively  when  they  are  about  to  enter  the  ' 
park.  " 

Article  III. 

To  Pass.  FROM  the  Order  in  Column  to  the  Order 
IN  Line,  and  the  Eeverse. 

In  all  formations  in  line  or  column  the  movements 
are  the  same,  whether  the  pieces  or  caissons  lead. 

Forward  into  Line. 

The  battery  being  in  column  at  a  halt,  to  form  it 
into  line  on  the- head  of  the  column,  gaining  ground 
to  the  left,  the  captain  commands: 

1.   Fonrardinfo  line — left  oblique.    2.  March.    8.   Guide 
right.     4.  Front. 

Figure  86.  At  the  first  command  the  chief  of  the 
leading  section  commands:  Section — forward,  and 
those  of  the  other  sections:  Section — left  oblique.  At 
the  command  March,. repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tions, the  leading  section  moves  to  the  front,  and 
its  chief  repeats  the  command  for  the  guide.  After 
advancing  eighteen  yards  he  commands:  Section  — 
Halt — Right  Dress. 

Each  of  the  other  chiefs  of  sections  repeats  the 
commands  for  the  guide,  and  conducts  his  section  by 
a  left  oblique,  until  by  the  direct  march  it  may  gain 
its  proper  interval  from  the  section  immediately  on 
its  right      He  then  commands:    Forward,  and  when 


SCHOOL    OF    TfJK    IJATTKRY.  .85 

witliiii  foui'  yards  of  tho  line,  Section— II Auv—Right 
Dress. 

When  the  battery  is  aligned,  the  captain  commands: 
■  Front. 

The  movement  is  executed  on  the  opposite  flank 
accoi-ding  to  the  same  ])rinciplcs,  and  b}^  inverse 
means. 

In  this  case  the  commands  are:  Forward  into  line — 
••■  ri(/ht  oblique— March — Guide  left — Front. 

The  formation  forward  into  line,  by  a  right  or  left 
oblique,  is  executed  in  a  similar  manner  when  the 
column  is  in  march.  In  this  case  the  chief  of  the 
leading  section  gives  no  command  except  for  the 
guide,  until  he  has  advanced  the  distance  before  pre- 
scribed.    He  then  halts  his  section  as  before. 

To   Form  Line  Faced  to  the  Eear. 

The  battery  being  in  column  at  a  halt,  to  form  it 
into  line  faced  to  the  rear,  on  the  head  of  the  column 
gaining  ground  to  the  left,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Into  line  faced  to  the  rear— left  oblique.     2.  March. 
8.   Guide  right.     4.  Front. 

Figure  37.  At  the  iirst  command  the  chief  of  the 
leading  section  commands:  Section — forward;  and 
>; those  of  the  other  sections:  Section— left  oblique.  At 
the  command  March,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tions, the  movement  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  the 
preceding  movement,  with  the  exception  of  the  align- 
ment. When  the  leading  section  has  advanced  eighteen 
yJlrds,  it  is  halted  by  its  chief  until  the  centre  section 
arrives  upon  the  same  line.  He  then  commands  : 
Countermarch— MxviQ.n)  and  when  the  countermarch 
is  nearly  comi)lcted:  SeHion—llAm — Left  Dress. 


86  SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTERV. 


The  centre  section  is  halted  upon  the  line  in  like 
manner  until  the  left  section  conies  up,  and  is  then 
counterniai'ched  and  aligned  hy  the  same  commands. 

AVhen  the  left  section  arrives  upon  the  line,  it  is 
countermarched  before  halting,  and  then  aligned  like 
the  rest. 

When  the  centre  and  left  sections  are  counter- 
marched, the  commands  Halt  —  Left  Dress  should 
be  given,  if  possible,  when  they  are /oi;r  yards  in  rear 
of  the  line  on  whicli  the  leading  section  is  established. 

When  the  batteiy  is  aligned,  the  captain  com- 
mands :   Front. 

The  movement  is  executed  on  the  opposite  flank  ac- 
cording to  tlic  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 
Jn  this  case  the  commands  are :  Info  line  faced  to  the 
rear— right  oblique — March —  Guide  left — Front. 

The  formation, into  line  faced  to  the  rear,  by  a  right 
or  left  oblique,  is  executed  in  a  similar  manner  when 
the  column  is  in  march.  In  this  case,  as  the  leading 
section  is  already  in  motion,  its  chief  only  repeats  the 
command  for  the  guide. 

The  countermarch  of  sections  will  be  executed  at 
the  gait  ordered  for  the  rear  of  the  column. 

To  Form  Line  to  the  Eight  or  Left. 

The  battery  being  in  column,  in  march,  or  in  halt, 
to  form  it  into  line  to  the  left,  the  captain  commands  : 

I.  Left  into  line^  wheel.     2.  March.     3.  Battery — ^alt. 
4.  Jjeft  Dress.     5.  Front. 

Figure  88.  At  the  first  command  the  chiefs  of 
sections  command  :  Section — Left  loheel;  and  at  the 
second,  which  they  repeat,  all  the  sections  wheel  to 
the  left.     Each  chief  of  section  commands:  Fontxird — 


'**.• 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    J^ATTEIIV.  87 


Guide  left  :isi  soon  as  his  leading  pivot  carriage  has 
taken  the  new  direction. 

When  the  rear  carriages  have  completed  the  wheel, 
and  the  sections  are  in  line,  the  captain  commands  : 
Battery — Halt — Left  Dress. 

The  commands  Halt — Left  Dress,  are  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  sections,  and,  wlien  the  alignment  is  com- 
pleted, the  captain  commands  :  Front. 

The  battery  is  formed  into  line  to  the  right  accord- 
ing to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

To  Form  Line  on  tjie   Right  oh  Left. 

The  battery  marching  in  column,  to  form  it  into 
line  on  the  right,  the  captain  commands  : 

J.   On  the  right  into  line.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  right. 

4.  Front. 

Figure  o9.  At  the  first  command  the  chief  of  the 
leading  section  commands:  Section — right  wheel  ;  and 
at  the  second,  which  he  repeats,  the  section  wheels  to 
the  right.  As  soon  as  the  leading  pivot  carriage 
enters  the  new  direction,  he  commands:  Forward — ■ 
Guide  right ;  and  as  the  section  completes  the  wheel 
and  unmasks  the  column,  he  commands  :  Section — 
Halt — Might  Dress. 

The  chiefs  of  the  other  sections  repeat  the  com- 
mand for  the  guide,  and  their  sections  continue  to 
move  forward.  As  each  section  passes  the  one  pi-e- 
ceding  it  in  the  formation,  its  chief  establishes  it  on 
the  line,  with  the  proper  interval,  by  the  same  com- 
mands. The  commands  Section — HAi/r — Bight  Dress 
are  given  when  the  section  m  four  yards  in  rear  of  the 
line. 

When  the  battery  is  aligned,  the  captain  commands  r 
Front. 


8c>  SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTEllY. 

The  line  is  formed  on  the  left  according  to  the  same 
principles,  and  by  inverse  moans.  The  commands 
are  :   On  the  left  into  line — March — Guide  left — Front. 

When  the  column  is  at  a  halt,  the  line  is  formed  on 
the  rio'ht  or  left  in  the  same  manner.  In  this  case 
the  chiefs  of  the  two  rear  sections  command :  Section 
—  fonoard,  and  afterwiird  repeat  the  commands 
March — Guide  right  (or  left). 

To  Break  into  Column  to  the  Front. 

The  battery  being  in  a  lino  at  a  halt,  to  break  into 
the  column  to  the  front  from  the  right,  the  captain 
commands : 

1.  B(/  section  from  the  right — fj'ont  into  column. 
2.  March.     3.   Guide  left. 

Figure  40.  '  At  the  first  command  the  chief  of  the 
right  section  commands:  Section— forward ;  and  those 
of  the  other  sections  :  Section — right  oblique.  At  the 
command  March,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  right 
section,  that  section  moves  forward,  and  its  chief  re- 
peats the  command  for  the  guide. 

Each  of  the  other  chiefs  of  sections  rej^eats  the 
commands  March — Guide  left  after  the  section  on  his 
right  has  commenced  the  movement,  and  when  the 
leaders  of  its  rear  carriages  are  in  line  with  him. 
After  obliquing  sufficientlj'-  to  gain  the  rear  of  the 
preceding  section,  he  commands  :  Forward. 

To  commence  the  movement  at  a  trot,  the  captain 
commands  : 

1.^  IJy  section  from  the  right— ^front  into  column — trot. 
2.  March.     3.   Guide  left. 

'    At  the  first  command   the  chief  of  the  right  «ec- 


ft 

SCHOOL    OF     I'irE    KATTKRY.  89 

tioii  commands:  Section— forward  trot;  thoso  of  the 
other  sections:  Section — forward.  At  the  command 
Maiicii,  re])cated  b}'  the  chiefs  of  sections,  the  right 
section  moves  at  a  trot,  and  the  other  sections  at  a 
walk,  their  chiefs  adding  the  commands  for  the  guide. 

The  chiefs  of  the  centre  and  left  sections  command: 
Section-^ right  oblique  —  trot  in  time  to  command 
March  when  the  leaders  of  the  rear  carriages  of  the 
section  on  their  right  are  opposite  to  them. 

This  rule  for  commencing  movements  at  a  trot  is 
gene  nil. 

The  movement  is  executed  from  the  left  according 
tx)  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

To   Brkak  into  Couimn  to  the   Rear 

The  battery  being  in  line,  in  marcii,  or  at  a  halt,  to 
break  into  column  to  the  rear  from  one  of  the  flanks, 
the  captain  executes  an  about  or  a  countermarch, 
according  to  the  kind  of  carriage  lie  may  wish  in 
front,  then  halts  the  battery,  and  breaks  it  into 
column  to  the  front  by  the  preceding  manoiuvre. 

To  Break  IiNto  Column  to  the  Eight  or  Left. 

The  battery  being  in  line,  in  march,  or  at  a  halt,  to 
break  it  into  column  to  the  left,  the  captain  com- 
mands : 

I.  By  section — left  wheel.     2.  March.     3.  Forward. 
4.   Guide  left. 

Figure  41.  At  the  first  command  the  chiefii  of 
sections  command:  Section- — left  wheel;  and  at  the 
second,  repeated  by  those  chiefs,  all  the  sections 
wheel  to  the  left.     When  the  wheels  are  nearly  com- 

8 


90  8(;»u;<)ii  OF    riiK   i;attkuy. 

pletcd,  the  vaptain  commands:  FcHUVArai — Giiidi:  le/f ; 
and  the  chiefs  of  scction.s  repeat  the  commands. 

When  the  column  is  not  to  advance,  tlie  command 
Colmnn  —  Halt  is  substituted  for  Forward — Guide 
left 

The  battery  is  broken  into  column  to  the  right  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

To  Break  into   Column  to  the   P^ront  from   One 
Flank  to  March  TOWAiin  the  Other. 

The  battery  being  in  line  at  a  halt,  to  break  from 
the  right  to  march  to  the  left,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  By  section — break  fro7n  the  rujht — to  march  to  the  left. 
2.  March.     3.   Guide  left. 

Figure  42.  At  the  first  command  the  chief  of  the 
right  section  conimands:  Section — forward;  and  at  the 
second,  which  he  repeats,  the  section  moves  forward, 
and  he  commands:  Guide  left.  After  advancing  eleven 
yards,  he  changes  the  direction  to  the  left  by  the  com- 
mands: Section — left  wheel — March — Forward. 

Each  of  the  other  chiefs  of  sections  commands:  aS'^c- 
tion — forward  in  time  to  command  March  when  the 
limber  wheels  of  the  rear  carriages  in  the  section  pre- 
ceding his  own  arrive  in  front  of  him.  He  then  con- 
ducts the  section  to  the  front,  changes  its  direction  to 
the  left,  and  places  it  in  rear  of  the  preceding  section 
by  the  commands  already  prescribed  for  the  section 
on  the  right. 

The  battery  is  broken  from  the  left  to  march  to  the 
right  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse 
means. 


«CHOOL    OF    THE    BATTERY.  01 

To    Break    into   Column   to   tue   Rear  from  One 
Plank  to  March   toward  the  Other. 

The  })atteiy  being  in  line  at  a  halt,  to  break  to  the 
rear  from  one  flank  to  march  toward  the  other,  the 
ca])tain  first  execiitcB  an  about  or  countermarch,  ac- 
cording to  the  kind  of  carriage  he  may  wish  in  front. 
He  then  lialts  the  battery,  and  executes  the  preceding 
manoeuvre. 

To  Break  into  Column  to  the    Front  when   the 
Battery  is  Marching  in  Line. 

The  batteiy  marching  in  line  at  a  walk,  to  break 
into  column  to  the  front  from  the  right,  and  at  the 
same  gait,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  By  the  right  —  break  into  sections.     2.  March. 
3.   Guide  left. 

The  chief  of  the  right  section  repeats  the  command 
for  the  guide,  and  his  section  continues  to  move  at  the 
same  gait.  At  the  command  March,  the  other  sec- 
tions are  halted  by  the  command  Section  —  Halt  from 
their  chiefs. 

The  halted  sections  are  put  in  motion  successively 
by  their  chiefs;  each  commanding  Section  —  right  ob- 
lique in  time  to  command  March  when  the  leaders 
of  the  rear  carriages  in  the  section  on  his  right  arrive 
opposite  to  him. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  at  a  trot,  the  move- 
ment is  executed  according  to  the  same  principles. 
But  the  sections  which  halted  in  the  preceding  case 
shickcn  the  gait  to  a  walk  at  the  commands  Walk — 
March  from  their  chiefs.  They  again  trot,  and  enter 
the  column  by  the  commands  Section — right  oblique — 
frot — March — Forward. 


92  SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTERY. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  line  at  a  walk,  to 
break  into  column  from  the  right  at  a  trot,  the  cap- 
tain commands : 

1.  By  the  right  —  break  into  sections  —  trot.     2.  March. 

3.   Guide  left. 

At  the  first  command  the  chief  of  the  right  section 
commands:  Trot,;  and  at  the  second,  which  he  re- 
peats, the  section  changes  its  gait  to  a  trot.  He  after- 
ward repeats  the  command  Guide  left. 

Each  of  the  other  sections  continues  to  march  at  a 
^valk  until  required  to  enter  the  column,  when  its 
chief  conducts  it,  as  already  described,  by  the  com- 
mands Section  —  right  oblique  —  trot  —  March  —  For- 
ward. 

The  battery  is  broken  into  column  from  the  left  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles,  and  b}-  inverse  means. 

To  Form  Line  Advancing. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  column  at  a  w^alk, 
to  form  it  into  line  at  a  trot,  gaining  ground  to  the 
left,  and  continue  the  march,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  Form  line  advancing  —  left  oblique — trot.     2.  March. 

o.   Guide  right. 

The  chief  of  the  leading  section  repeats  the  com- 
mand for  the  guide,  and  his  section  continues  to  move 
at  a  walk. 

At  the  first  command  the  chiefs  of  the  other  sec- 
tions command  :  Section — left  oblique — trot.  The  com- 
mand March  is  repeated  by  the  same  chiefs;  and 
w^hen  the  oblique  movement  is  commenced,  they  re- 
peat the  command  Guide  right.  Each  chief  com- 
mands: Forward  as  soon  as  his  section  has  obliqued 


SCHOOL    OF    THK    BATTKHY.  93 

sufficiently  to  the  lei't,  and  Walk  in  time  to  command 
March  as  it  arrives  on  the  line. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  column  at  a  trot, 
the  movement  is  executed  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples. In  this  case  the  captain  does  not  command 
Trot;  and  the  chief  of  the  leading  section  commands: 
Walk-— March  successively  after  the  first  and  second 
commands  of  the  captain.  The  chiefs  of  the  other 
sections  give  the  same  commands  as  their  sections 
arrive  on  the  line. 

The  movement  is  executed  so  as  to  gain  ground  to 
the  right  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  in- 
verse means. 

To   Form   Double  Column  on  the  Centre  Section. 

The  battery  being  in  line  at  a  halt,  to  form  double 

column  on  the  centre  section,  the  captain  commands: 

1.    Double  column  on  the  centre.     2.  Marcji.     8.   Guide 

right  (or  left). 

Figure  48.  At  the  first  command  the  chief  of  the 
centre  section  commands:  Section—forward;  the  chief 
of  the  right  section:  Section  — left  oblique;  and  the 
chief  of  the  lefl  section:  Section  — right  oblique:  At 
the  command  March,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the 
centre  section,  that  section  marches  to  the  front,  and 
Hs  chief  repeats  the  command  for  the  guide. 

When  the  wheel-horses  in  the  rear  rank  of  the 
centre  section  liave  passed  the  leaders  in  the  front 
rank  of  the  other  sections,  the  chiefs  of  those  sections 
repeat  the  command  March,  and  the  sections  com- 
mence the  oblique. 

When  the  piece  nearest  the  column  is  about  enter- 
ing it,  in  each  of  these  sections,  the  chief  of  the  right 


1)4  .SCHOOL    OJ'     rilK    JiATTKllY. 

8ectioji  commands.:  By  the  left — break  section — ^Iabch; 
and  the  chief  of  the  left :  By  the  right — break  section — 
March.  The  right  and  left  sections,  without  change 
of  gait,  then  form  into  columns  of  pieces  in  rear  of  the 
rio-ht  and  left  carriao-es  of  the  centre  section. 

The  chiefs  of  the  flank  sections  are  careful  to  make 
their  pieces  enter  the  column  at  the  proper  time. 
When  the  column  is  formed,  they  place  themselves  four 
yards  outside  of  it,  the  one  highest  in  rank  opposite 
the  leaders  of  his  leading  carriage,  the' other  opposite 
the  leaders  of  the  front  carriage  of  his  rear  piece. 
In  these  positions  they  command  the  pieces  abreast 
of  them  as  sections  for  the  time  being. 

The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  follows  the  move- 
ment, sees  that  his  carriages  do  not  enter  the  column 
too  soon,  and,  when  the  column  is  formed,  places 
himself /o?^r  yards  in  rear  of  its  centre. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  at  a  walk,  to  form 
the  double  cohnnn  at  the  same  gait,  the  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.  Double  column  on  the  centre.     2.  March.     3.   Guide 

right  (or  left^. 

The  chief  of  the  centre  section  repeats  tlie  com- 
mand for  the  guide,  and  the  section  continues  to 
advance. 

At  the  command  March,  the  other  sections  ai*e 
halted  by  the  command  Section  —  Halt  from  their 
chiefs.  The)'  are  afterward  formed  into  column  by  the 
commands  and  means  prescribed  for  forming  double 
column  from  a  halt. 

When  the  ba-ttery  is  marching  at  a  trot,  the  double 
column  is  formed  according  to  the  same  principles, 
lu  this  case  the  flank  sections  pass  to  a  walk,  instead 


SdlOdL    Ol'    'l'»tK     liAi'l'KKV.  UO 

of  IjaJling  as  before,  aiul  resume  Ihc  trot,  to  oblique 
and  enter  the  column.  The  commands  from  their 
chiefs  arc:  Walk — March  —  Section  —  left  (or  right) 
oblique — trot — March,  and  Ihj  the  left  (or  right) — break 
sectio  v — M  A  R  0  n . 

When  llie  battery  is  niarching  at  a  walk,  to  form 
the  double  column  at  a  trot,  the  captain  commands: 

I.   Double  eoluntn  on.  the  centre  —  trot.     2.  March. 
8.   Guide  right  (or  left). 

At  the  first  command  the  chief  of  the  centre  sec- 
tion commands:  Trot.  At  the  second,  which  he  re- 
peats, the  section  moves  forward  at  a  moderate  trot, 
and  he  repeats  tlie  command  for  the  guide. 

The  flank  sections  continue  to  walk  until  the  centre 
has  advanced  sufficiently  to  allow  them  to  oblique, 
and  are  then  formed  into  column  as  ah-eady  pre- 
scribed; their  chiefs  commanding:  Section  —  left  (or 
right)  oblique — trot — March;  and  By  the  left  (or  right) 
— break  section — March. 

Jf  the  battery  is  at  a  halt,  the  chief  of  the  centre 
section  commands:  Forward — trot;  and  the  chiels  of 
the  other  sections :  Forward  after  the  first  command 
from  the  captain.  At  the  second,  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  sections,  all  move  forward,  the  flank  sections 
at  a  walk;  and  the  movement  is  completed  as  already 
dii'ected. 

To  form  the  double  column  with  a  battery  of  four 
or  of  eight  pieces,  the  captaiji  gives  the  same  com- 
mands as  with  a  battery  of  six.  Tu  the  four-gun 
battery,  the  right  section  is  broken  into  column  of 
pieces  by  the  lelt,  and  the  left  section  is  broken  by 
the  right  at  the  commands  of  the  chiefs  of  sections, 
who  place  themselves  <»n  the  outer  flanks  of  the  col- 


1)6  SOriUOL    OF    TIIK    IJATTERY. 

umn,  and  command  the  temporary  sections,  as  directed 
for  the  flank  sections  of  the  battery  of  six  pieces. 

Ill  the  battery  of  eight  pieces,  the  double  column  is 
formed  on  tlie  two  centre  pieces  according  to  the  same 
2)rinciples.  The  flank  sections  oblique,  and  form  in 
column  of  pieces  behind  the  centre  sections  at  the 
commands  of  their  chiefs,  who  then  take  post  on  the 
flanks  of  the  column,  and  command  the  temporary 
sections  formed  from  their  own,  the  senior  of  the  two 
commanding  the  leading  one. 

To  Deploy  the  Double  Column  into  Ltne  to  the 

Front. 

The  battery  being  in  double  column  at  a  halt,  to 
form  it  into  line  to  the  front,  the  captain  commands  : 

].  Forvjard  into  line.     2.  March.     3.  Front. 

Figure  44.  At  the  first  command  the  chief  of  the 
centre  section  commands:  Section — ■forward;  the  chief 
of  the  right  section:  Section  into  line  —  right  oblique; 
and  the  chief  of  the  left  section:  Section  into  line  — 
left  oblique.  At  the  command  March,  repeated  by 
these  chiefs,  the  centre  section  advances  five  yards, 
and  its  chief  commands:  Section — tlALT-— Right  (or 
left,  Dress. 

The  flank  sections  oblique  to  the  right  and  left; 
and  as  their  pieces  arrive  in  rear  of  their  proper 
places  on  the  line,  they  move  forward,  halt,  and  dress 
toward  the  centre  without  command. 

As  soon  as  the  battery  is  aligned,  the  captain  com- 
mands :  Front. 

When  the  column  is  marching,  the  movement  is 
executed  in  the  same  manner.  In  this  case  the  chief 
of  the  centre  section    docs  not   command  Section  — 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    BATTERY.  97 

foi'ioard' — March;    but  halts   and   aligns   his  section 
after  advancing  five  yards. 

When  the  column  is  marching  at  a  trot,  to  deploy 
it  into  line  to  the  front  at  the  same  gait,  without  dis- 
continuing the  march,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  Form  line  advancing.     2.  March.     3.    Guide   right 

(or  left). 

At  the  first  command  the  chief  of  the  centre  sec- 
tion commands:  Walk;  the  chief  of  the  right  sec- 
tion: Section  into  line  —  right  oblique ;  and  the  chief  of 
the  left  section  :  Section  into  line — left  oblique.  At  the 
command  March,  repeated  by  these  chiefs,  the  centre 
section  slackens  its  gait  to  a  walk,  and  the  flank  sec- 
tions deploy.  As  each  piece  arrives  upon  the  line  its 
gait  is  changed  to  a  walk  without  command.  The 
movement  is  executed  as  in  the  preceding  cases;  but 
when  the  line  is  formed  it  continues  to  advance,  the 
captain  commanding  Guide  right  (or  left)^  which  com- 
mand is  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections. 

When  the  column  is  marching  at  a  walk,  to  deploy 
it  into  line  to  the  front  at  a  trot,  without  discontinu- 
ing the  march,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  Form  line  advancing — trot.     2.  March.     3.  Guide 

right  (or  left). 

At  the  first  command  the  chief  of  the  right  section 
commands:  Section  into  line — right  oblique — trot;  and 
the  chief  of  the  left  section  :  Section  into  line — left 
oblique — trot.  At  the  command  March,  repeated  by 
these  chiefs,  the  flank  sections  deploy  at  a  trot;  the 
centre  section  continues  to  march  at  a  walk;  and, 
the  line  having  been  formed  as  in  the  preceding  case, 
the  captain  gives  the  command  for  the  guide. 
9 


9&>  SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTERY. 

When  the  battery  consists  of  four  or  eight. pieces, 
the  double  column  is  deploj^ed  into  line  to  the  front 
by  the  same  commands  from  the  captain  as  when  it 
consists  of  six.  The  chiefs  of  sections  give  the  same 
commands  as  in  the  other  case.  When  the  line  is  to 
be  halted,  as  in  forming  forward  into  line,  tlie  leading 
chief  commands:  Halt — Bight  {ov  left)  Dress  as  soon 
as  the  leading  carriages  have  advanced  Jive  3'ards; 
and  the  alignment  is  made  upon  the  central  carriages. 

To  Form  the  Double  Column   into    Line  to  the 
Eight  or  Left. 

The  battery  being  in  double  column  at  a  halt,  to 
foi'm  it  into  line  to  the  right,  the  captain  commands: 

L   To  and  on  the  right  into  line,    2.  March.    3.  Front. 

At  the  first  command  the  chief  of  the  leading  sec- 
tion commands :  Section — Right  wheel;  and  the  other 
chiefs  of  sections  :  Forward.  At  the  second,  repeated 
by  those  chiefs,  the  leading  section  wheels  to  the 
right,  and  is  established  on  the  line.  The  other  pieces 
advance  under  the  direction  of  their  chiefs  and  of  the 
chiefs  of  sections,  wheel  to  the  right  in  succession  lis 
they  arrive  opposite  their  places,  establish  themselves 
on  the  line,  and  dress  upon  the  pieces  already  aligned. 
When  the  alignment  is  completed,  the  captain  com- 
mands :  Front. 

When  the  column  is  marching,  the  line  is  formed  to 
the  right  in  the  same  manner,  except  that  the  chiefs 
of  the  flank  sections  omit  the  commands  Forward  — 
March.  The  line  is  formed  to  the  left  according  to 
the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  moans. 

When  the  battery  consists  of  four  or  eight  pieces, 
the  double  column  is  deployed  into  line  to  the  right  or 


SCHOOL   OF    THE    BATTERY.  99 

left  by  the  same  commands  from  the  captain  as  when 
it  consists  of  six.  In  this  case  the  leading  j^ieces  are 
wheeled  to  the  right  or  left,  as  a  section,  and  estab- 
lished on  the  line.  For  this  purpose  the  leading  chief 
of  section  commands  :  Right  (or  left)  wheel — March — • 
Forward — Guide  right  (or  left) — Halt — Eight  (or  left) 
Dress.  The  other  pieces  move  forward,  wheel  in  suc- 
cession as  they  arrive  opposite  their  places,  and  form 
on  the  line,  as  already  described. 


Article  IV. 

M  0  V  E  M  K  N  T  S    IN     LINE. 

To  Advance  in  Line. 

The  battery  being  in  line  at  a  halt,  to  cause  it  to 
advance,  the  captain  indicates  to  the  guide  the  points 
on  which  he  is  to  march,  and  commands : 

1.  Battery  —  forward.     2.  March.     3.  Guide  right  (or 

left). 

The  commands  Forward — March — Guide  right  (or 
left)  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections.  At  the 
command  March,  all  the  carriages  move  forward  at  a 
walk,  and  the  chiefs  of  sections  preserve  the  align- 
ment toward  that  chief  of  carriage  who  serves  as 
guide  of  the  line.  The  guide  marches  steadily  in  the 
given  direction,  and  the  chiefs  of  carriages  regulate 
their  intervals  and  alignment  by  him. 

The  carriages  of  the  rear  rank  follow  those  in  front 
at  their  appropriate  distance  of  two  yards.  The  chief 
of  the  line  of  caiyeons  superintends  the  march  of  the 


100       .  SCHOOL   Oi*   THE   BATTEIIY. 

rear  rank  of  carriages,  and  moves  wherever  his  pres- 
ence may  be  necessary  for  that  purpose. 

To  Halt  the  Battery  and  Align  it. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  line,  to  halt  and 
align  it,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Battery— Halt.    2.  Right  (or  left)  Dress.   3.  Front. 

The  commands  Halt — Bight  (or  left)  Dress  are 
repeated  by  the  chiefo  of  sections.  At  the  first  com- 
mand tffb  carriages  and  detachments  halt,  and  at  the 
second  align  themselves  by  the  right  (or  left)  in  their 
respective  ranks;  the  carriages  dressing  by  the  driv- 
ers of  their  wheel-horses.  The  carriages  are  placed 
as  squarely  on  the  line  as  possible,  without  opening  or 
closing  the  intervals.  The  captain  superintends  the 
alignment  of  the  front  rank  of -carriages,  and  the 
chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  that  of  the  rear;  each 
placing  himself  for  that  purpose  on  the  flank  of  the 
guide.  When  the  battery  is  aligned,  the  captain  com- 
mands :  Front. 

\7hen  the  battery  is  halted,  if  it  cannot  be  aligned 
by  slight  movements,  the  captain  causes  one  or  two 
carriages  from  one  of  the  flanks  or  centre  to  advance 
four  yards,  or  to  a  greater  distance  if  necessary,  and 
then  causes  the  alignment  to  be  made  by  the  right, 
left,  or  centre,  by  the  command  Right,  Left,  or  On 
the  centre — Dress.  At  this  command  the  carriaires 
and  detachments  move  forward,  and  align  themselves 
according  to  the  principles  just  explained;  the  drivers 
halting  a  little  in  rear  of  the  line,  and  dressing  for- 
ward, so  as  to  place  the  carriages  as  squarely  upon  it 
as. possible. 


school  of  the  battery.         .  101 

Changes  of  Gait. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  line,  the  changes 
of  gait  are  effected  by  the  commands  and  means  pre- 
scribed for  changes  when  marching  in  column. 

To  March  by  a  Flank. 

Figure  45.  The  battery  baing  in  line,  in  march  or 
at  a  halt,  to  cause  it  to  move  in  the  direction  of  one  of 
its  flanks,  the  captain  commands : 

1.   Batter  1/ — by  tJie  right  (pv  left)  flank.     2.  March. 

And  the  movement  is  executed  as  prescribed  for 
the  same  movement  when  the  battery  is  marching 
in  column. 

Oblique  March. 

Figure  46.  The  battery  being  in  line,  in  march  or 
at  a  halt,  to  gain  ground  to  the  front  and  toward  one 
of  the  flanks,  and  afterward  resume  the  direct  march, 
the  captain  commands :  Battery — left  (or  right)  oblique^ 
which  is  executed  in  the  same  manner  as  the  oblique 
in  column. 

Passage  of  Carriages  in  Line. 

When  the  battery  is  in  line,  the  passage  of  car- 
riages is  executed  by  the  commands  and  means  pre- 
scribed for  the  passage  of  carriages  in  column. 

About  in  Line. 

When  the  battery  is  in  line,  the  about  is  executed 
by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  for  the  same 
movement  when  in  cohimn,  substituting  the  word 
battery  for  column. 


102         •  school  of  the  battery. 

Countermarching  in  Line. 

The  countermarch  of  a  battery  in  line  is  executed 
by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  for  the  same 
movement  in  column,  substituting  the  word  battery 
for  column  in  the  command. 

To  ChanctE  Direction  in  Line. 

The  battery  being  in  line  at  a  halt,  to  wheel  it  to 
the  right,  the  captain  commands : 

1.    Battery  —  right  wheel.      2.  March.      3.  Forward. 
4.  Battery — Halt.     5.  Right  Dress.     G.  Front. 

The  commands  Right  wheel — March — Forward — 
Halt — Right  Dress  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tions. 

Figure  47.  'At  the  command  March,  the  pivot 
carriage  moves  at  a  walk,  and  describes  a  quadrant 
(tiventy-tico  3'ards)  of  a  circle  whose  radius  is  fourteen 
yards.  The  other  carriages  move  at  a  trot,  and  pre- 
serve their  intervals  from  the  pivot.  They  regulate 
their  gaits  according  to  the  distance  from  the  pivot,  so 
as  to  remain  as  short  a  time  as  possible  in  rear  of  the 
line,  without  urging  their  horses  injuriously,  and  so 
as  to  arrive  upon  it  in  succession.  The  carriages  of 
the  rear  rank  follow  at  the  proper  distance  in  the 
tracks  of  those  in  front. 

At  the  command  Forward,  which  is  given  when 
the  leading  pivot  carriage  has  described  its  arc  of 
twenty-two  yards,  the  carriage  moves  direct  to  the 
front;  and  when  the  rear  pivot  carriage  is  in  the  new 
direction,  the  captain  commands :  Battery — Halt — 
Right  Dress.  The  commands  Forward  — Halt  — 
Right  Dress  are  repeated  by  the  cliiefs  of  the  light 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY.  108 

section  immediately  after  the  captain,  and  by  the 
other  chiefs  in  time  to  be  applicable  to  their  sections; 
the  pivot  carriages  halting  at  the  command  Halt, 
and  the  others  halting  and  dressing  toward  the  pivot 
as  they  arrive  in  succession  on  tlie  line. 

When  the  battery  is  aligned,  the  captain  commands: 
Front. 

The  battery  is  wheeled  to  the  left  according  to  the 
same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

When  the  battery  is  at  a  halt  or  marching  in  line, 
to  wheel  it  to  the  right  and  continue  the  march,  the 
captain  commands: 

1.  Battery— right  wheel.    2.  March.    3.  Forward. 

The  movement  is  executed  as  already  described, 
except  that  the  pivot  carriage,  after  wheeling,  con- 
tinues to  march  in  the  new  direction,  and  the  others 
conform  to  its  gait  and  direction  as  they  arrive  on  the 
line. 

The  direction  is  changed  on  the  left  according  to 
the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

To  Close  Intervals  in  Line. 

When  the  batter}^  is  marching  in  line  at  a  walk  or 
trot,  to  diminish  its  intervals,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  On  right  (or  left)  'piece  of  ■ section  to  

yards — dose  intervals . 

Figure  48.    The  chief    of    the  section    designated 

re])eats  the  command  :   On  right  (or  left)  piece  to 

yards — close  intervals;  and  the  other  chiefs  of  sections 
command  :  Right  (or  left)  to yards — close  inter- 
vals. At  the  command  March,  repeated  by  the  same 
chiefs,  the  piece   designated   as  the   one  of  direction 


104  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTERY. 

raoves  forward  at  a  walk,  and  the  others  oblique 
toward  it  at  a  trot.  Each  obliquing  carriage  regu- 
lates its  march  by  the  one  next  toward  the  carriage 
of  direction,  and,  after  closing  to  the  prescribed  inter- 
val, moves  forward  on  the  alignment  of  the  directing 
carriage,  and  slackens  the  gait  to  a  walk. 

As  soon  as  the  intervals  are  closed,  the  command  for 
the  guide  is  renewed  by  the  captain,  and  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  sections. 

When  the  intervals  are  to  be  closed  toward  one  of 
the  flanks,  the  captain  commands : 

1.   On  right  (or  leff)  piece  to yards — close  inter- 
vals.    2.  March. 

About  or  Countermarch  with  Diminished 
Intervals. 

The  battery  being  in  line  with  diminislied  intervals, 
in  march  or  at  a  halt,  to  execute  an  about  or  counter- 
march, the  captain  commands : 

1.  Pieces  and  caisso7is  —  left  about  (or  countermarch). 

2.  Right  pieces  forward  (or  right  'pieces  forward  — 
trot). 

3.  March. 

The  chiefs  of  sections  repeat  these  commands.  At 
the  second  the  right  carriages  of  each  section  move 
forAvard,  and  as  soon  as  the}^  are  disengaged  from  the 
line,  the  captain  commands :  March.  All  the  car- 
riages execute  the  required  movement  at  this  com- 
mand, with  the  gait  corresponding  to  tliat  of  the 
carriages  in  front. 

In  regard  to  the  change  of  gait,  these  movements 
are  executed   according  to  the  principles  presci'ibed 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY.  105 

in  order  that  the  right  carriages  may  move  out  of 
line  and  return  to  it  again  at  the  completion  of  tlie 
movement. 

To  Eesumk  Intervals. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  line  with  dimin- 
ished intervals,  to  cause  the  regular  intervals  to  be 
resumed,  the  captain  commands : 

1.    Oil  right  (or  left)  piece  of section—full  inter- 
vals.   2.  March. 

^^  Figure  49.  The  chief  of  the  section  designated 
repeats  the  command  :  On  right  (or  left)  piece — full 
intervals;  and  the  other  chiefs  of  sections  command: 
From,  the  right  (or  leff) — full  intervals. 

At  the  command  March,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of 
sections,  the  carriage  of  direction  in  each  rank  con- 
tinues to  march  to  the  front,  and  the  others  oblique 
from  it  at  an  increased  gait,  to  regain  their  intervals. 
Each  carriage  regulates  its  march  by  the  one  adjoin- 
ing toward  the  carriage  of  direction,  and,  when  the 
interval  is  regained,  moves  forward  on  the  alignment, 
and  resumes  its  gait. 

As  soon  as  the  movement  is  completed,  the  com- 
mand for  the  guide  is  renewed  hy  the  captain,  and 
repealed  by  the  chiefs  of  sections. 

When  the  intervals  are  to  be  resumed  from  one  of 
the  flanks,  the  captain  commands : 

1.   On  right  (or  left)  piece— full  intervals.     2.  March. 

Passage  of  Obstacles. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  line,  to  pass  an 
obstacle  which  presents  itself  in  front  of  one  of  th<^ 
sections,  the  captain  commands: 


1U6  SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    BATTKRY. 

1. Section..     2.  Obstacle. 

At  the  command  OBSTACLt:,  the  chief  of  the  section 
designated  observes  the  obstacle,  and  gives  the  nec- 
cssaiy  commands  for  closing  on  one"  of  the  adjoining 
sections,  removing  from  it,  breaking  his  section,  or 
halting  it,  and  forming  in  cohimn  in  rear  of  one  of  the 
adjoining  sections.  The  section  generally  resumes 
the  regular  march  by  means  the  inverse  of  those 
used  for  passing  the  obstacle.  It  resumes  its  place  at 
an  increased  gait,  and  by  the  commands  Section  into 
line — Xarcii  fi-om  its  chief. 

The  passage  of  defiles  is  nothing  more  than  the 
passage  of  obstacles,  which  requires  the  line  to  be 
broken  into  column  of  sections,  by  one  of  the  ma- 
noeuvres prescribed  for  passing  from  the  order  in  line 
to  the  order  in  column.  When  it  becomes  necessary 
to  break  the  sections,  they  should  be  formed  again 
in  succession  by  their  chiefs  as  soon  as  the  ground 
will  permit. 


Article  V. 

FORMATIONS  IN  BATTERY. 

In  Line,  with  Pieces  in  Front,  to  Form  in  Battery 
TO  THE  Front. 

When  the  battery  is  in  line  at  a  halt,  with  the 
pieces  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  front,  the 
captain  commands : 

1.  In  BATTERY.     2.   Guide  left.     3.  March. 

Figure  50.  At  the  command  In  battery,  the  cais- 
sons stand  fast  and  the  pieces  advance.     The  intervals 


k 


SCHOOL  OF  thj:  battery.  107 

and  alignment  are  preserved,  and  the  chiefs  of  pieces 
and  of  the  section  march  at  their  phiccs  in  line. 

At  the  command  March,  which  is  given  as  soon' 
as  they  have  advanced  seventeen  yards,  the  chiefs  of 
pieces  and  of  the  section  halt,  and  the  pieces  execute 
.an  about.  As  soon  as  the  about  is  completed,  the 
pieces  are  halted,  unlimbered,  and  prepared  for  firing, 
the  limbers  being  taken  to  their  places  in  batter^'  by 
ail  about. 

When  the  pieces  come  about,  the  one  already  des- 
ignated as  such  continues  to  be  the  guide,  and  the 
alignment  is  made  on  it. 

When  the  cannoneers  are  marching  by  the  sides  of 
their  pieces  they  halt  at  the  command  March,  allow 
their  pieces  to  pass  them,  change  sides,  and  move  for- 
ward to  the  posts  they  are  to  occupy  when  their  pieces 
have  completed  the  about.  They  are  not  required  to 
observe  any  particular  order  during  this  movement. 

When  the  cannoneei's  are  mounted  on  the  ammu- 
nition-chests, those  on  the  caissons  dismount  and  run 
to  their  posts  at  the  command  In  battery.  Those  on 
the  pieces  dismount  after  the  about. 

The  chiefs  of  pieces,  and  of  the  section,  take  their 
posts  in  battery  as  soon  as  that  formation  is  completed. 
This  rule  is  (jeneral. 

After  the  formation,  the  captain  rectiiies  the  align- 
ment if  necessary.  The  piece  originally  designated 
as  such  continues  to  be  the  guide  until  the  movement 
is  completed,  and  the  alignment  is  made  upon  it. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  line,  with  the 
pieces  in  front,  it  is  formed  in  battery  to  tho  front 
according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  the  com- 
mands : 

1.  In  battery.     2.  March. 


108  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tions, and,  at  the  command  In  battery,  the  caissons 
halt,  the  cannoneers  dismounting  and  running  to  their 

J)0StS. 

To  Form  in  Battery  to  the  Front,  by  Throwing 
THE  Caissons  to  the  Eear, 

When  the  battery  is  in  line  at  a  halt,  with  the 
pieces  or  caissons  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the 
front  by  throwing  the  caissons  to  the  rear,  the  captain 
commands  : 

Action  front. 

This  command  is  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections, 
and  the  pieces  are  unlimbered  and  wheeled  about  by 
hand.  The  limbers  and  caissons,  reversing  to  the  left 
at  the  same  time,  move  to  the  rear,  and  take  their 
places  in  battery  at  their  proper  distances  by  another 
reverse. 

When  the  cannoneers  are  mounted  on  the  ammuni- 
tion-chests, they  dismount  as  soon  as  the  command 
Action  front  is  given,  and  run  to  their  posts. 

The  battery  is  generally  in  line  at  a  halt  when  this 
mode  of  coming  into  action  is  resorted  to.  It  may 
also  be  used  in  successive  formations  bj^  giving  the 
command  Action  front  when  a  ])art  of  the  battery 
has  been  halted  on  the  line.  But  with  bad  ground  or 
heavy  pieces  this  mode  of  coming  into  action  should 
not  be  used. 

In  Line,  with  Caissons  in  Front,  to  Form  in 
Battery  to  the  Front. 

When   the   battery  is   in    line   at  a   halt,  with   tlie 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTERY.  |t:109 

caissons  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  front,  the 
captain  commands : 

1.  Fieces,  pass  your  caissons — March.    2.  In  battery — 
Guide  left  (or  right).     3.  March. 

P'iGURE  51.  These  commands  are  repeated  b\^  the 
chiefs  of  sections,  the  pieces  pass  their  caissons,  and, 
at  the  command  In  battery,  given  as  soon  as  the 
pieces  have  passed  their  caissons,  the  formation  is 
executed  as  j:)rescribed  for  forming  in  battery  with 
pieces  in  front. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  line,  with  the 
caissons  in  front,  it  is  I'ormed  in  battery  to  the  front 
according  to  the  same  principles,  and  b}^  the  com- 
mands Pieces  pass  your  caissons  (or  Pieces^  jyass  your 
caissons  —  trot)  —  March  —  In  battery —  Guide  left — 
March. 

In  Line,  with  Pieces  in  Front,  to  Forim  in  Battery 

to  the  Bear. 

AVhen  the  battery  is  in  line  at  a  halt,  with  tlie 
pieces  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  rear,  the 
captain  commands : 

1.  Mre  to  the  rear.     2.  Caissons,  pass  your  pieces — trot — 
March.     S.  In  Battery. 

Figure  52.  The  commands  are  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  sections.  At  the  second,  the  caissons  oblique 
to  the  right,  pass  their  pieces  at  a  brisk  trot,  advance 
seventeen  yards  bej^ond  them,  execute  a  reverse  to- 
gether, and  take  their  places  in  battery.  At  the 
third,  which  is  given  as  soon  as  the  caissons  have 
passed,  the  cannoneers  unlimber  and  prepare  for 
liring. 


110  SCHO'OL    OF    THE    BATTERY. 

When  the  cannoneers  arc  mounted  on  the  ammuni- 
tion-chests tl»e  caissons  halt  to  allow  the  cannoneers 
to  dismount,  before  executing  tiie  reverse.  As  soon 
as  the  caissons  halt,  the  cannoneers  dismount  and  run 
to  their  posts.  AYhen  the  battery  is  at  a  halt,  as  in 
the  present  case,  it  is  considered  better  to  dismount 
the  cannoneers  before  commencing  the  movement. 
Tlie  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  precedes  the  move- 
ment of  his  carriages,  and  places  himself  on  the  line 
to  be  occupied  by  their  leaders  when  the  reverse  is 
commenced.  He  takes  his  place  in  battery  as  soon 
as  the  reverse  is  completed  and  the  carriages  are  on 
the  line. 

When  the  batterj  is  marching  in  line,  with  the 
pieces  in  front,  the  formation  in  battery  to  the  rear  is 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  the 
same  commands.  ,  At  the  command  In  battery,  which 
is  given  as  soon  as  the  caissons  have  passed  their 
pieces,  the  latter  halt,  and  the  movement  is  completed 
as  already  described. 

In  Link,  with  Caissons  in  Front,  to  Form  in 
Battery  to  the  Eear. 

When  the  battery  is  in  line  at  a  halt,  with  the 
caissons  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  rear,  the 
captain  commands: 

1.  Fire  to  the  rear.     2.  In  battery. 

Figure  53.  At  the  command  In  battery,  which  is 
repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  the  cannoneers 
un limber  and  prepare  for  tiring. 

The  chiefs  of  pieces  and  sections  take  their  places 
in  battery.. 

The  caissons  move  at  a  brisk  trot  and  take  their 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    KATTKllV.  Ill 

places  in  buttery,  under  the  snpcrintendcnee  of  tlieir 
chief. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  line,  with  the 
caissons  in  front,  the  formation  in  battery  to  tlie  rear 
is  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by 
the  same  commands. 

In  Battery,  to  Form  in  Line  to  the  Front, 

Being  in  battery,  to  form  in  line  to  the  front,  with 
the  caissons  in  rear,  the  captain  commands: 

LlxMBER  TO  THE  FRONT. 

This  command  is  repeated  by  the  chiois  of  sections, 
and  the  pieces  are  limbered  as  described  in  the  School 
of  the  Piece;  the  caissons  closing  at  the  same  time  to 
the  proper  distance  without  further  command. 

When  the  captain  wishes  to  pLace  the  caissons  in 
front,  he  commands:  Limber  to  the  front;  and, 
while  the  pieces  are  limbering.  Caissons,  pass  your 
pieces  —  trot — March.  The  caissons  pass,  and  halt  in 
front  of  their  pieces;  or,  if  the  captain  wishes  the 
battery  to  advance,  he  commands:  Forward — Guide 
right  (or  left)  as  the  cassions  are  completing  the 
passage. 

The  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tions. 

When  the  pieces  can  not  be  wheeled  about  by  hand, 
the  captain  commands:  Limber  to  the  rear;  and, 
Avhen  this  is  executed,  if  he  wishes  to  retain  the  pieces 
in  front,  he  commands: 

\.    Pieces,  left   about  —  caissons,  forward.     2.    March. 
3.  Battery — Halt. 

Figure  51.     The  command  Limber  to  the  rear  is 


112  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY. 

repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections.  The  first  and 
second  commands  are  also  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of 
sections,  and  the  pieces  execute  tlie  about;  the  cais- 
sons closing  at  the  same  time  to  tioo  yards.  The 
third  command  is  given  as  soon  as  the  about  is  com- 
pleted, and  the  word  halt  being  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  sections  the  pieces  halt,  and  place  themselves 
squarely  on  the  line. 

The  captain  rectifies  the  alignment,  if  necessary, 
and  commands :  Front. 

When  the  battery  is  to  advance  immediately,  the 
captain  commands:  Forward — Guide  right  (or  left) 
instead  of  Battery  —  Halt;  and  the  caissons  close  on 
the  march. 

Figure  55.  When  the  captain  wishes  to  place  the 
caissons  in  front,  he  may  cause  the  pieces  to  be  lim- 
bered to  the  rear  as  before,  and  commands  : 

1.  Caissons,  pass  your  pieces — trot — pieces,  left  about. 
2.  March.  3.  Battery — Halt,  or  Forward — Guide 
right  (or  left). 

These  commands  are  repeated. 

The  pieces  execute  the  about  at  once,  the  caissons 
move  straight  to  the  front,  and  so  pass  the  pieces 
during  the  execution  of  the  about. 

In  Battery,  to  Form  in  Line  to  the  Eear. 

When  in  battery,  to  form  in  line  to  the  rear,  the 
captain  causes  the  pieces  to  be  limbered  to  the  rear; 
and  then,  if  he  wishes  to  place  the  caissons  in  front, 
commands  : 

1.    Caissons,   left  about — pieces,  forward.     2.   March. 
3.  Battery — Halt,  or  Forward — Guide  right  (or  left). 


jjgtik, 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTERY.  11 

Figure  56.  The  first  two  commands  are  repeated 
by  the  chiefs  of  sections;  the  caissons  execute  the 
about,  and  the  pieces  close  to  their  proper  distances. 
The  third  command,  which  is  given  at  the  moment 
the  about  is  finished,  is  repeated  and  executed  as  pre- 
scribed. 

The  captain  rectifies  the  alignment  if  necessary, 
and  commands:  Front. 

If  the  formation  in  line  to  the  rear  is  to  be  exe- 
cuted by  placing  the  pieces  in  front,  the  captain,  after 
causing  the  pieces  to  be  limbered  to  the  rear,  com- 
mands : 

1.  Pieces,  pass  your  caissons — caissons^  left  about.  2. 
March.  3.  Battery — Halt,  or  Forward — Guide 
right  (or  left). 

Figure  57.  The  first  two  commands  are  repeated 
by  the  chiefs  of  sections;  at  the  command  March, 
the  pieces  pass  their  caissons  by  moving  direct  to  the 
front,  the  caissons  executing  the  about  at  the  same 
command,  and  so  regulating  the  gait  as  to  take  their 
proper  distances. 

The  captain  rectifies  the  alignment  if  necessary, 
and  commands:  Front. 

In  forming  line  to  the  rear,  the  caissons  may  be 
phiced  at  once  either  in  front  or  in  rear  of  their 
pieces.  To  effect  this  the  captain  commands  :  Limber 
to  the  rear,  and  immediately  adds,  to  place  them  in 
front : 

1.  Caissons,  in  front  of  your  pieces  (or  Caissons,  in  front 
of  your  pieces — trot).     2.  March. 

While  tlie  pieces  are  limbering,  the  caissons  oblique 
to  the  right,  move  forward  near  the  middle  of  the 
interval  between  the  leaders  of  the  pieces,  place  them- 
10 


114  SCHOOL    OF    THK    BATTERy. 


selves  in  tVoiit  of  them  by  two  successive  wheels  to 
the  left,  and  halt. 

If  he  wishes  to  place  them  in  rear,  the  commands 
are  : 

1.  Caissons,  in  rear  of  your  pieces  (or  Caissons,  in  rear 
of  your  pieces — trot).     2.  March. 

The  caissons  incline  to  the  right,  pass  their  pieces, 
move  sufliciently  to  the  rear,  and  the-n  by  a  left  reverse 
take  their  positions  in  rear  of  their  pieces. 

The  commands  in  both  cases  are  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  sections. 

In  Column,  with  Pieces  in  Front,  to  Form  in  Bat- 
tery TO  THE  Front. 

When  the  battery  is  in  column  at  a  halt,  with  the 
pieces  in  froiit,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  front,  by 
gaining  ground  to  the  left,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  Forward  into  battery — hft  oblique.     2.  March. 
o.   Guide  right. 

Figure  58.  At  the  first  command  the  chief  of  the 
leading  section  commands:  Section — forward;  and 
those  of  the  other  sections:  Section — left  oblique.  The 
chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  moves  quickly  to  the  right 
of  the  leading  section,  to  cause  the  caissons  to  halt  at 
the  proper  time  and  to  superintend  their  alignment. 
At  the  command  March,,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of 
sections,  the  movement  is  executed  as  prescribed  for 
forming  line  to  the  front.  But,,  as  each  section  arrives 
on  the  line,  instead  of  halting,  its  chief  forms  it  in 
battery  to  the  front  by  the  commands:  In  batteiiy — 
March. 

The  formation    in    battery  to  the   front,  by  gaining 


v'S3.N*l*S»ii,-.,,.   .   .. 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY.  115 

grouDd  to  the  right,  is  executed  according  to  the  same 
principles,  and  by  inverse  means.  The  commands 
are  : 

Forward  into  battery—right  oblique  — March  — Guide 

left. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  column,  it  is 
formed  in  battery  to  the  front  by  applying  the  same 
principles. 

In  Column,  with  Caissons  in  Front,  to  Form  in 
Battery  to  the  Front. 

When  the  battery  is  in  column  at  a  halt,  with  the 
caissons  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  front,  by 
gaining  ground  to  the  left,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  Forward  into  battery— left  oblique.     2.  March. 
?>.   Guide  right. 

Figure  59.  At  the  first  command  the  chief  of  the 
leading  section  commands:  Section— forward;  and 
those  of  the  other  sections:  Section— left  oblique.  The 
chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  moves  quickly  to  the 
right  of  the  leading  section,  to  halt  the  caissons  at 
the  proper  time  and  to  superintend  their  alignment. 
At  the  command  March,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of 
sections,  the  movement  is  executed  as  prescribed  for 
forming  line  to  the  front.  But,  as  each  section  arrives 
on  the  line,  instead  of  halting,  its  chief  forms  it  in 
battery  to  the  front  by  the  commands:  Pieces,  pass 
your  caisso7is— March — In  battery — March. 

The  formation  in  battery  to  the  front,  by  gaining 
ground  to  the  right,  is  executed  according  to  the  same 
principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

When    the    batter}-  is   marching   in    column,   it   is 


116  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY. 

formed  in  battery  to  the  front  by  applying  the  same 
principles. 

In  Column,  with  Pieces  in  Front,  to  Form  in       - 
Battery  to  the  Eear.  ^Bb 

When  the  battery  is  in  column  at  a  halt,  with  the 
pieces  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  rear,  by 
gaining  ground  to  the  left,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  Into  battery  J  faced  to  the  rear — left  oblique.  2.  March. 
■    3.  Guide  right. 

Figure  60.  At  the  first  command  the  chief  of  tlie 
leading  section  commands:  Section — forward;  and 
those  of  the  other  sections  :  Section — left  oblique.  The 
chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  goes  to  tlie  right  of  the 
leading  section,  to  direct  the  reverse  of  the  caissons 
and  to  superintend  their  alignment.  At  the  command 
March,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  the  move- 
ment is  executed  as  prescribed  for  forming  line  to  the 
front.  But,  as  each  section  arrives  on  the  line,  instead 
of  halting,  its  chief  forms  it  in  battery  to  the  rear  by 
the  commands:  Fire  to  the  rear — Caissons,  pass  your 
pieces — trot — March — In  battery. 

The  formation  in  battery  to  the  rear,  by. gaining 
ground  to  the  right,  is  executed  according  to  the  same 
principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  column,  it  is 
formed  into  battery  to  the  rear  by  applying  the  same 
principles. 

In  Column,  with  Caissons  in  Front,  to  Form  in 
Battery  to  the  Bear. 

The  battery  being  in  column  at  a  halt,  with  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY.  117 

caissons  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  rear,  by 
gaining  ground  to  the  left,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  Into  battery ,  faced  to  the  rear — left  oblique.    2.  March. 

3.   Guide  right. 

Figure  61.  At  the  first  comrnxuid  the  chief  of  the 
leading  section  commands:  Section  —  forward;  and 
those  of  the  other  sections  :  Section — left  oblique.  The 
chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  goes  to  the  right  of  tlie 
leading  section,  to  direct  the  about  of  the  caissons 
and  to  superintend  their  alignment.  At  the  command 
March,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  the  move- 
ment is  executed  as  prescribed  for  forming  line  to  the 
front.  But,  as  each  section  arrives  on  the  line,  instead 
of  halting,  its  chief  forms  it  into  battery  to  the  rear 
by  the  commands :  JP'ire  to  the  rear — In  battery. 

The  formation  in  battery  to  the  rear,  by  gaining 
ground  to  the  right,  is  executed  according  to  the  same 
principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  column,  it  is 
formed  into  battery  to  the  rear  by  applying  the  same 
principles. 

In  Column,  with  Pieces  in  Front,  to  Form  in 
Battery  to  the  Right  or  Left. 

When  the  battery  is  in  column,  in  march  or  at  a 
halt,  with  the  pieces  in  front,  if  the  captain  wishes  to 
form  it  in  battery  to  the  left,  by  gaining  ground  to 
the  right,  he  commands  : 

1.  Fire  to  the  left — by  section,  right  loheel.     2.  March. 

3.   Caissons  J  pass  your  pieces — trot.     4.  March. 

5.  In  battery. 

Figure  62.     At  the  first  command  the  chiefs  of  the 


118  SCHOOL  OF  THK  BATTERY. 

sections  comniaiul :  Section  —  right  tvheel ;  and  at  the 
second,  which  they  repeat,  all  the  sections  wheel  to 
the  right.  Tiie  caissons  follow  their  pieces  at  the 
proper  distance. 

At  the  commands  Caissons,  jjass  your  pieces — trot — 
March,  which  arc  given  before  the  completion  of  the 
wheel,  and  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  all  the 
caissons  pass  their  pieces  at  a  trot. 

At  the  command  In  battery,  which  is  given  and 
repeated  in  like  manner  as  soon  as  the  caissons  have 
passed  and  the  pieces  are  square  on  the  new  line,  all 
the  sections  form  at  once  into  battery  to  the  rear. 

When  the  captain  wishes  to  form  in  battery  to  the 
left,  by  gaining  ground  to  the  left,  he  commands  : 

1.  Fire  to  the  left — by  section,  left  wheel.     2.  March. 
8.  In  battery.     4.  March. 

Figure  08.  At  the  first  command  the  chiefs  of 
sections  command:  Section — left  wheel;  and  at  the 
second,  which  they  repeat,  all  the  sections  wheel  at 
once  to  the  left. 

At  the  command  liN  battery,  which  is  given  and 
repeated  as  soon  as  the  caissons  have  completed  the 
wheel,  all  the  sections  form  at  once  into  battery  to 
the  front. 

The  two  formations  in  battery  to  the  right,  by 
gaining  ground  to  the  left  or  right,  are  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse 
means.  The  commands  are  :  Fire  to  the  right — by  sec- 
tion, left  wheel  —  March  ;  caissons,  pass  your  pieces — 
trot  —  march  —  In  battery;  or,  Ii\re  to  the  right  —  by 
section,  right  wheel  —  March  —  In  battery  —  March. 
(Figure  04.) 


school  of  the  j5attery.  110 

In  Column,  with  Caissons  in  Front,  to  Form  in 
Battery  to  the  Eight  or  Left. 

When  the  battery  is  in  column,  in  march  or  at  a 
halt,  with  the  caissons  in  front,  to  form  it  in  battery 
to  the  left,  by  gaining  ground  to  the  right,  the  captain 
commands  : 

1.  Fire  to  the  left  —  by  section^  right,  wheel.     2.  March. 
3.  In  battery. 

Figure  65.  At  the  first  command  the  chiefs  of 
sections  command:  Section  —  right  wheel ;  and  at  the 
second,  which  they  repeat,  the  sections  wheel  at  once 
to  the  right,  and  move  to  the  front  at  the  commands 
Forward — Guide  right  from  their  chiefs. 

At  the  command  In  battery,  which  is  given  and 
repeated  as  soon  as  the  ])ieces  are  square  on  the  new 
line,  all  the  sections  form  at  once  into  battery  to  the 
rear. 

To  form  in  battery  to  the  left,,  gaining  ground  to 
the  left,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Fire  to  the  left  —  hy  section,  left  wheel.  '1.  March. 
8.  Pieces,  pass  your  caissotis.  4.  March.  5.  In 
battery.     6.  March. 

Figure  66.  At  the  first  command  the  chiefs  of 
sections  command:  Section  —  left  loheel ;  and.  at  the 
second,  which  they  repeat,  the  sections  wheel  at  once 
to  the  left.  The  third  and  fourth  commands  are  given 
and  repeated  just  before  the  completion  of  the  wheel ; 
and  the  fifth  is  given  when  the  pieces  have  passed 
their  caissons  and  the  latter  are  square  upon  the  new 
line.  The  sections  are  then  formed  in  battery  to  the 
front. 

The  formation   in   battery  to  the  right,  by  gaining 


120  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTERY. 

ground  to  the  right  or  left,  are  executed  according  to 
the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means.  (Figure 
67.) 

In  Column,  with  Pieces  in  Front,  to  Form  in 
Battery  on  the  Hight  or  Leet. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  column,  with  the 
pieces  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  on  the  right,  the 
captain  commands : 

1.   On  the   right  into   battery.     2.   March.      3.   Guide 

right. 

At  the  first  command  the  chief  of  the  leading  sec- 
tion commands:  Section  —  right  icheel;  and  the  chief 
of  the  line  of  caissons  goes  to  that  section.  At  the 
command  March,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  lead- 
ing section,  that  section  wheels  to  the  right,  and  its 
chief  conducts  it  to  the  line  by  tiie  commands  For- 
ward—  Guide  right.  And  then,  without  halting,  it  is 
formed  fnto  battery  to  the  front,  by  the  commands 
In  battery — March — from  its  chief. 

The  other  sections  continue  to  advance;  and,  as 
each  arrives  opposite  its  place  in  battery,  after  pass- 
ing the  one  i^j'cccding  it  in  the  formation,  it  is  formed 
into  battery  by  its  chief,  by  the  commands  Section  — 
right  wheel — March — Forward — Guide  right — In  bat- 
tery— March;  tiie  command  In  battery  being  given 
as  the  caissons  arrive  in  line  with  those  already 
established. 

The  formation  in  battery  on  the  left  is  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse 
means. 

When  the  battery  is  in  column  at  a  halt,  it  is  formed 
in  battery  on  the  right  or  left  according  to  the  same 


SCHOOL    or    THE    IJATTERY.  121 

principles,  in  tliis  case,  the  chiefs  of  the  two  rear 
sections  command:  Section — forward  immediately  after 
the  first  command  of  the  captain,  and  then  repeat  the 
commands  March — Guide  right  (or  hft). 

In  Column,  with  Caissons  in  Front,  to  For^i  jn 
'  Battery  on  thk  Right  or  Left. 

When  the  battery  is  marchiniij  in  column,  with  thc< 
caissons  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  on  the  right,  the 
captain  commands : 

1.    On  the   right  into  batter y.      2.   March,     o.    (ruide 

right. 

At  the  first  command  the  ciiicf  of  the  leadini*;  sec- 
tion commands:  Section — right  loheej ;  and  the  chiel 
of  the  line  of  cjiissons  goes  to  that  section.  At  the 
command  March,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  leading 
section,  that  section  wheels  to  the  right,  and  is  con- 
ducted to  the  line  b}^  the  commands  Forward — (ruide 
right  from  its  chief;  as  soon  as  it  reaches  the  line, 
the  section  is  formed  in  battery  .to  the  front  by  the 
commands  Pieces,  pasa  your  caissons  —  March — In 
battery — March  from  its  chief 

The  other  sections  continue  to  advance,  and,  as 
each  arrives  opposite  its  place  in  battery,  after  having 
passed  the  one  preceding  it  in  the  formation,  it  is 
wheeled  to  the  right,  and  formed  into  battery  by  its 
chief,  in  the  same  manner  as  the  leading  section. 

The  formation  in  battery  on  the  left  is  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse 
means. 

When  the  battery  is  in  column  at  a  halt,  it  is  formed 
in  battery  on  the  right  or  left  according  to  the  same 
principles. 
U 


/ 


I'l'l.  HCHOOL    OF    THE    UATTEllY. 

To  Deplov  the  J)ouhle  Column   into  Battery  to 
THE  Front  or  Kear. 

The  hjilterv  beini;  in  double  column  at  a  halt,  to 
deploy  it  into  batteiy  to  the  front,  the  captain  com- 
mands: 

1.  Forward  into  battery.     2.  MarciJ. 

At  the  lirst  command  the  chief  of  the  centre  sec- 
tion commands:  Section — forward;  that  of  the  right: 
Section  —  into  line — rig/it  oblif/ue ;  that  of  the  left: 
Section  into  line  —  left  oblique;  and  the  cliief  of  the 
line  of  caissons  £coes  to  the  leadini:;  section.  At  the 
command  Xarch,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections, 
the  centre  section  advances  Jioe  yards,  and,  without 
halting,  is  forme(!l  into  battery  to  the  front. 

The  pieces  of  the  flank  sections  are  brought  upon 
the  line  by  obliquing,  and  placed  successively  in  bat- 
tery without  command;  regulating  by  the  centre  sec- 
tion. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  double  column,  it 
is  deployed  into  bat'tery  to  the  front  in  the  same  man- 
ner, except  that  the  chief  of  the  centre  section  does 
not  command  Section—  forward — March. 

When  the  battery  is  in  double  column,  marching  or 
at  a  halt,  it  is  deployed  into  battery  to  the  rear  ac- 
cording to  the  same  })rir)ci])les.     The  commands  are: 

I.  Into  battery^  faecd  to  thv  rear.     2.  March. 

When  the  battery  consists  of  four  or  eight  pieces, 
the  double  column  is  deployed  into  battery  to  the 
front  or  rear  by  tlio  same  commands  from  the  captain 
as  when  it  consisted  of  six.  The  sections  are  formed 
into  battery  as  prescribed  for  the  flank  sections  in 
this  number.      The  leadinir  chief  of  section,  besides 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY.  123 

superintending  the  formation  of  his  own,  gives  the 
commands  required  for  the  centre  section,  and  the 
leading  pieces  conform  to  the  movements  of  that  sec- 
tion. 

To  Deploy  the  Double  Column   into  Battery  to 
THE  Eight  or  Left. 

When  the  battery  is  in  double  column,  marching  or 
at  a  halt,  to  form  it  in  battery  to  the  right,  the  cap- 
tain commands  : 

1.   To  and  on  the  right  into  battery.     2.  March. 

The  centre  section  is  formed  in  battery  on  the  right 
as  prescribed  for  the  leading  section. 

The  other  pieces  are  brought  into  line,  and,  without 
halting,  are  formed  successively  in  battery  to  the  front 
without  commands;  regulating  by  the  centre  section. 

The  deployment  into  battery  to  the  left  is  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse 
means. 

When  the  battery  consists  of  four  or  eight  pieces, 
the  column  is  deployed  into  battery  to  the  right  oi' 
left  by  the  same  commands  from  the  captain  as  when 
it  consists  of  six.  In  this  case,  the  leading  pieces  are 
wheeled  to  the  right  or  left  as  a  section,  and  conduct- 
ed to  the  line  by  the  leading  chief  of  section.  And 
then,  without  halting,  they  are  formed  into  battery  to 
the  front  by  the  same  chief  The  other  pieces  move 
forward,  wheel  in  succession  as  they  arrive  opposite 
their  places,  and  form  in  battery  on  the  alignment  of 
those  already  established. 


124  SCHOOL  OF  the  battkry. 

To  Pass  from  the  Order  in  Battery  to  the  Order 

IN  Column. 

Being  in  battery,  to  Ibrni  column,  the  captain  first 
causes  the  line  to  be  formed,  and  then  forms  column 
by  one  of  the  manoeuvres  for  passing  from  the  order 
in  line  to  the  order  in  column. 

To  3lARcn  BY  A  Flank. 

Beirig  in  battery,  to  gnin  ground  to  the  left,  for  tlic 
purpose  of  forming  again  in  battery  without  an  inter- 
mediate formation,  the  captain  causes  the  pieces  to  be 
limbered  to  the  rear,  and  commands : 

1.  Pieces,  right — caissons,  left — loltcel.     2.  March. 
o.  Forward.     4.   Guide  right. 

Figure  (58.  These  commands  are  repeated  by  the 
tdiiefs  of  sections^ 

The  movement  to  gain  ground  to  the  left  may  be 
executed  by  limbering  at  once  to  the  left;  the  cais- 
sons wheeling  to  the  left  Avhile  the  pieces  are  limber- 
ing; and  tlie  captain  afterward  commanding:  For- 
ward — M ARCH —  Guide  right. 

The  movement  to  gain  ground  to  the  right  is  ex- 
ecuted by  either  of  the  methods  above  described, 
■applying  the  satne  ])i'inciple.s,  and  l)y  inverse  means. 

As  soon  as  the  battery  has  reached  the  position  on 
the  left  which  it  is  intond<'(l  to  occupy,  the  captain 
commands : 

•  i.   Battery,  by  the  left  Jiank.     2.  .March,     n.  Fire  to  the 
rear.     1.  J.\  jjattery. 

The  commands  By  the  left  Jieuik — March  are  re- 
peated by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  and  executed  as  usual. 
The  commands  Fire  to  the  rear — In  battery  arc  given 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY.  125 

and  repeated  as  soon  as  the  pieces  have  completed  the 
wheel,  and  executed  as  prescribed. 

When  tlie  battery  is  to  move  to  a  flank,  and  bo 
formed  into  battery  again  on  the  same  line,  it  may  be 
executed  by  limbering  to  the  front,  marching  to  a 
flank,  and  then  commanding:  Column — by  the  right  (or 
left)  flank — Mauch — Fire  to  the  rear— In  battery  j  the 
caissons  taking  their  proper  places  in  battery  by  a 
left  about. 

The  same  thing  may  be  executed  by  limbering  to 
the  right  or  left,  gaining  ground  to  the  flank,  halting, 
and  commanding:  Action  left,  or  Actio?^  rihht. 


Article  VT, 

FIRINGS. 

When  everything  is  prepared  for  flring,  the  captain 

commands : 

Commence  Firing. 

This  command,  given  by  itself  or  after  Load,  is 
repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  and  the  flring  is 
immediately  commenced. 

To  Are  by  battery,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  Fire  by  battery.     2.  Battery — Fire. 

The  first  command  is  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tions; the  second  is  not  repeated. 

To  flre  by  half-battery,  the  commands  of  the  cap- 
tain are  : 

1.  Fii'e  by  half-battery.     2.  Right  (or  left)  half -battery — 

Fire. 


126  SCHOOL  OF  THK  BATTERY. 

To  fire  by  section  : 

1.  Fire  by  section.    2.  Bight  (centre  or  left)  section—  Fire. 

To  fire  b}^  piece  : 

1.  Fire  by  piece.    2.  Right  section — right  (or  left)  piece — 

Fire. 

The  chiefs  of  half-batteries  or  sections  repeat  the 
first  command,  and  immcdiatel}'  designate  their  re- 
spective commands  as  Right  or  left  half-battery  — 
Right  or  left  section.  They  do  not  repeat  the  second 
commands. 

The  firing  is  discontinued  by  the  command  or  sig- 
nal: 

Cease  Firing. 

This  command  is  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections 
and  of  pieces,  and  the  loaded  pieces  discharged  or  the 
load  drawn,  except  in  the  case  when  the  battery  is 
retiring  with  the  prolonge.  , 

To  move  and  fire  with  the  prolonge  fixed,  the  cap- 
tain gives  the  necessary  directions.  It  is  but  seldom 
that  this  mode  of  moving  and  firing  is  necessary,  and 
it  Avill  onl}^  be  resorted  to  when  circumfitances  re- 
quire it. 

To  Fire  Advancing. 

When  the  battery  is  firing,  to  advance  b}^  half-bat- 
teries, the  captain  commands : 

1.  Fire  advancing  by  half -battery .    2.  Right  half-battery — 

Advance. 

At  the  second  command  the  chief  of  the  right  half- 
battery  discontinues  firing,  causes  his  pieces  to  be 
limbered  to  the  front,  and  commands:  Forward — 
March — Guide  left.     Or  he  may  cause  them  to  be 


SCHOOL    OF    THi:    BATTERY.  IZt 

limbered  to  the  rear,  and,  after  executing  the  about, 
command:  Forward — Guide  left.  The  half- battery 
advances,  and  the  caissons  preserve  their  distance  in 
battery. 

As  soon  as  the  right  half-batter}'  reaches  the  new 
position,  previously  indicated  by  the  captain,  its  chief 
places  it  in  battery  by  the  commands  Halt  —  Action- 
front;  or,  In  batteuv — March;  the  two  last  com- 
mands being  given  in  quick  succession.  The  caissons 
halt  at  these  commands,  and,  as  soon  as  the  pieces 
are  uidimbered,  the  iiring  is  renewed  by  command 
from  the  chief  of  half-battery. 

The  fire  of  the  left  half- battery  is  continued  during 
the  movement  of  the  right,  care  being  taken  to  direct 
the  pieces  so  that  their  tire  shall  not  injure  the  half- 
battery  in  advance. 

As  soon  as  the  right  half-battery  commences  firing 
the  left  moves  forward  with  the  guide  U)  the  right; 
and,  after  passing  the  rigbt  half-battery  as  far  as  the 
latter  has  advanced,  is  formed  into  batter}-  and  the 
firing  commenced.  The  n^ovements  of  the  left  half- 
battery  are  effected  by  commands  and  means  cor- 
responding to  those  of  the  right. 

The  riirht  half-battery  again  advances  as  soon  as 
the  left  commences  firing,  and  the  two  continue  to 
advance  alternately  until  the  captain  causes  the  firing 
to  cease.  Tlxe  batter}^  is  then  aligned,  or  formed  into 
line  to  the  front  or  rear,  by  the  proper  commands 
from  the  capttiin. 

While  advancing  by  half-battery,  the  captain  places 
himself  habitually  with  the  most  advanced  portibn  of 
the  battery;  and  in  six-gun  batteries  is  accompanied 
by  the  chief  of  the  centre  section.  The  chief  of  the 
line  of  caissons  remains  habitually  with  the  rear  half- 
battery. 


128  SCHOOL    OF    THK    IJATTEllY. 

To  lire  udvancing  by  luilf-battery,  commencing  with 
the  left,  is  executed  according  to  the  same  principles, 
and  by  inverse  means. 

The  movement  may  also  be  executed  by  section  ; 
the  sections  advancing  in  succession  according  to  their 
positions  in  the  battery. 

To    FlIlE    IN    Er.TREAT. 

AVhen  the  battery  is  firing,  to  retire  by  half-bat- 
teries, the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Fire  retiring  by  lialf-battenj.     2.  Riglit  half-battery. 

3.  Eetire. 

At  the  second  command  the  chief  of  the  right  half- 
battery  discontinues  firing,  limbers  to  the  rear,  and 
commands  :  Caissons,  left  about — March.  As  soon  as 
the  about  is  completed,  he  commands :  Forward — 
Guide  right,  jind  conducts  the  half- battery  to  the 
ground  previously  indicated  by  the  captain;  the 
pieces  preserving  their  distance  in  battery  by  march- 
ing nineteen  j^ards  in  rear-  of  the  caissons.  As  soon 
as  the  ground  has  been  reached,  the  chief  of  half- 
battery  commands:  Halt — Fire  to  the  rear— ^In  bat- 
tery, and  commences  firing;  taking  care  not  to  injure 
the  other  half- battery.  The  limbers  and  caissons 
remain. facing  toward  the  rear  as  long  as  the  firing  in 
retreat  continues. 

As  soon  as  the  right  half- battery  commences  firing 
the  left  retires  with  the  guide  to  the  Mft;  and,  after 
passing  the  right  half-batterj''  as  far  as  the  latter  has 
retired,  it  is  formed  into  battery,  and  the  firing  again 
commenced.  The  movements  are  executed  in  a  man- 
ner corresponding  to  those  of  the  other  half-battery. 

The  half- batteries  continue   to   retire   alternately 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTERY.  129 

until  the  captain  causes  the  firing  to  cease.  The  bat- 
tery is  afterward  aligned,  or  formed  iiito  line  to  the 
front  or  rear,  by  ap]:>ropriate  commands  from  the 
captain. 

While  retiring  by  half-battery  the  captain  remains 
habitually  with  the  ])ortion  of  the  battery  nearest  the 
enemy,  and  is  accompanied  by  the  chief  of  the  centre 
section.  The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  accom- 
jmnies  the  other  half-battery. 

To  fire  retiring  by  half-battery,  commencing  with 
the  left,  is  executed  according  to  tlie  same  principles, 
and  by  invei'se  means. 

The  movement  may  also  be  executed  by  sections ; 
the  sections  retiring  in  succession,  according  to  their 
positions  in  the  battery. 

Movements  for  Firing  in  Echelon. 

When  the  battery  is  in  line  at  a  halt,  with  pieces  in 
front,  to  advance  in  echelon  of  pieces,  the  captain 
commands : 

1.  By  'piece  from  the  right— front  into  echelon.  2.  March. 

Figure  69.  At  the  last  command  the  right  piece 
moves  forward,  followed  by  its  caisson.  The  next 
piece  moves  forward  in  like  manner  as  soon  as  its 
leaders  are  abreast  the  wheel-horses  of  the  rear  car- 
riage on  the  right;  and  the  other  pieces  co^nmence 
the  movement  in  succession  according  to  tlie  sanio 
rule.  , 

The  officers  preserve  the  same  relative  positions  as 
in  line. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  line,  at  a  walk 
or  trot,  the  echelon  is  formed  according  to  the  same 
principles,  and    by  the   same   commands;    the   gaits 


13Q  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY. 

being  regulated  as  in  breaking  sections.  The  battery 
advances  in  echelon  of  pieces  from  the  left  according 
to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

When  the  caissons  are  in  front,  the  battery  ad- 
vances in  echelon  of  pieces  from  the  right  or  left 
according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  the  same 
commands. 

When  the  battery  is  in  echelon,  inarching  or  at  a 
halt,  it  may  be  formed  into  battery  to  the  front,  rear, 
right,  or  left. 

When  firing  in  echelon  to  the  front  or  rear,  the 
direction  of  the  fire  may  be  changed  to  the  right  or 
left.  For  this  purpose  the  captain  orders  the  firing 
to  cease,  and  commands:  Action  right  (or  left). 
At  thivS  command  the  trails  of  the  ])ieces  are  turned 
to  the  left  (or  right),  and  the  limbers  and  caissons 
take  their  places  in  rear  of  the  pieces.  But  if  retir- 
ing with  the  prolonge  fixed,  the  caissons  stand  fast, 
and  the  limbers  back  to  allow  the  trails  to  be  turned 
in  the  proper  direction.  The  prolonge  must  be  suffi- 
ciently slack  to  allow  the  recoil  of  the  guns.  This 
last  method  is  only  applicable  to  firing  to  the  right 
when  retiring  b}'  the  right,  and  to  the  left  when 
retiring  b}'  the  left. 

l^EING  IN  ECHELO^V,  TO  FoHM  LiNE. 

The  l^tttery  being  in  echelon  at  a  halt,  to  form  it 
into  line,  the  captain  commands  : 

1,  On  the  right  (or  left)  piece— fonoard  into  line. 
2.  March. 

The  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tions. Each  piece  moves  forward  and  establishes 
itself  on  the  line,  dressing  on  the  piece  indicated. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    BATTERY.  131 

4,  If  the  btittery  is  in  march,  to  form  the  line  without 
halting,  the  commands  are  : 

1.  Form,  line  advancing ,  on  right  (or  left)  piece  —  trot. 

2.  March. 

The  pieces  to  the  rear  move  forward  at  the  in- 
creased gait,  and  take  tl)eir  positions  in  line. 

If  the  battery  is  in  echelon  and  firing,  to  form  it  in 
the  order  in  battery,  continuing  the  fire,  the  captain 
causes  the  pieces  behind  the  line  on  which  the  forma- 
tion is  to  be  made  to  cease  their  fire,  and  commands: 

1.   0?i  the  right  (or  left)  piece — fonoard  into  battery. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command  the  chief  of  the  ri^rht  section 
places  his  left  piece  on  the  line,  the  riglit  continuing 
its  fire.  The  chiefs  of  the  other  sections  cause  them 
to  be  limbered  to  the  front,  and  at  the  command 
March,  which  they  repeat,  move  them  forward,  and 
establish  them  in  battery  on  a  line  with  the  right 
section. 

To  Fire  to  the  Rear. 

When  the  battery  is  firing,  to  fire  in  the  opposite 
direction,  the  captain  causes  the  firing  to  cease,  and 
commands : 

1.  Fire  to  the  rear.     2.  Limbers  and  caissons,  pass  your 
pieces — trot.     ?>.  March. 

Figure  70.  These  commands  are  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  sections.  At  the  command  March,  the 
pieces  are  wheeled  about  by  turning  the  trails  to  the 
left  J  and  the  limbers  and  caissons  oblique  to  the 
right,  pass  them,  and  take  their  places  in  battery  b}'' 
a  left  reverse. 


182  SCHOOL   OF   THE    liATTEllY. 

When  the  pieces  can  not  be  wheelod  about  by  hand, 
the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Fire  to  the  rear.  2.  Limber  to  the  rear.  3.  Cais- 
sons, pass  your  jjienes —  trot — March.  4,  Pieces,  left 
about — March.     5.  In  battery. 


Article  YIl. 

changes  of  front  in  battery. 

Change  of  Front  to  Fire  to  the  Right,  Left  Wing 
Forward,  and  the  Ke verse. 

AVben  the  battery  is  fii'ino-,  if  tlic  captain  wishes  to 
make  a  perpendicuhir  change  of  front,  to  lire  to  the 
right,  throwing  forward  the  left  wing,  he  discontinnes 
tiring,  and  commands : 

1.  Fire  to  the  right.     2.   Change  front  forward  on  the 
right  piece,     o.  March. 

Figure  7L  At  the  second  command  the  chief  of 
the  right  section  places  the  right  piece  inthe  new 
direction,  by  causing  the  trail  to  be  moved  to  the  left. 
He  also  causes  the  left  piece  of  his  section  to  be 
moved  forward  by  hand,  and  established  on  the  new 
line.  When  the  ground'  is  unmasked,  the  limbers  and 
caissons  of  these  pieces  oblique  to  the  left,  move  for- 
ward, and  take  their  places  in  batter}'  by  wheeling  to 
the  right;  the  caissons  aligning  themselves  by  the 
•<ihief  of  the  line  of  caissons  established  pn  the  right. 

The  other  chiefs  of  sections  cause  their  pieces  tQ 
be  limbered  by  the  command  Limber  to  the  front; 
the  caissons  closing  upon  the  pieces  while  they  are 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTER5f:  133 

limbering.  As  soon  as  they  are  limbered,  the  chiefs 
of  sections  command  :  Forward. 

At  tlic  second  command  the  chief  of  the  lino  of 
caissons  places  himself  on  the  left  of  the  right  piece 
of  the  centre  section,  facing  to  the  front,  to  mark  the 
right  of  the  new  line  of  caissons. 

At  the  command  March,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of 
the  centre  and  left  sections,  these  sections  move  to  the 
li'ont;  and,  when  each  has  arrived  opposite  its  place 
on  tlie  new  line,  its  chief  commands:  (Section  —  right 
icheel  —  March  —  Forward;  and  afterward,  In  butterif 
—  March,  so  as  to  form  upon  the  alignment  of  tlic 
right  section.  When  the  caisson  of  the  right  piece  of 
the  centre  section  reaches  the  point  where  its  piece 
wheeled,  it  wheels  to  the  left,  takes  its  distance  in 
rear,  wheels  about,  and  dresses  to  tiie  right  upon  the 
line  of  caissons. 

The  othei-  caisson  of  the  same  section  obliques  to 
the  left  when  its  piece  commences  the  wheel ;  and, 
after  gaining  its  distance^  establishes  itself  on  the  line 
by  wheeling  and  dressing  to  the  right. 

When  the  pieces  are  too  heavy  to  be  moved  or 
wheeled  about  by  hand,  the  chiefs  of  sections  cause 
them  to  be  limbered,  with  the  exception  of  the  right 
piece,  by  the  command  Limber  to  the  rear.  The 
chief  of  the  right  section  then  commands  :  Piece,  left 
about  —  caisscifi,  forward;  and  the  chiefs  of  the  other 
sections:  Pieces,  left  about  —  caissons,  forward.  At  the 
command  March,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections, 
the  pieces  are  wheeled  about  and  directed  to  the  front 
by  the  command  Forward  from  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tions. The  left  piece  of  the  right  section  is  estab- 
lished on  the  line  b}'  the  commands  Right  wheel  — 
March — Forward  —  In  battery  —  March   from   the 


134  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY. 

chief  of  the  section.  The  caisson  wheels  to  the  left 
when  it  reaches  the  point  where  its  piece  wheeled  to 
the  right;  and,  after  taking  its  distance,  Avheels  about 
and  dresses  to  the  right  upon  the  chief  of  the  line  of 
caissons.  The  other  sections  are  established  upon  the 
line  as  already  described. 

The  pivot  piece  commences  firing  again  as  soon  as 
it  is  in  position,  and  the  others  as  they  arrive  on  the 
line. 

The  change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  left,  right  wing 
forward,  is  executed  according  to  the  same  principles, 
and  by  inverse  means. 

Change  of  Front  to  Fire  to  the  Left,  Left  Wing 
Forward,  and  the  Keverse. 

When  the  battery  is  firing,  if  the  captain  wishes  to 
make  a  perpendicular  change  of  front  to  fire  to  the 
left,  throwing  forward  the  left  wing,  he  discontinues 
firing,  and  commands: 

1.  Fire  to  the  left.     2.  Change  front  forward  on  the  right 
piece.     4.  March. 

At  the  second  command  the  chief  of  the  right  sec- 
tion causes  the  right  piece  to  be  placed  in  the  new 
direction  at  once,  b}^  moving  the  trail  to  the  right; 
and  the  limber  and  caisson  of  that  piece  will  oblique 
to  the  right,  and  take  their  places  in  its  rear  by 
wheeling  to  the  left  j  the  caisson  dressing  upon  the 
chief  of  the  line  of  caissons.  He  also  causes  his  left 
piece  to  be  moved  to  its  place  and  established  on  the 
line  by  hand )  the  limber  of  this  piece,  passing  it  on 
the  right,  takes  its  place  by  wheeling  to  the  left,  its 
caisson  obliques  to  the  right,  passes  on  the  right,  and 
in  rear  of  the  right  caisson,  and  takes  its  place  also 
by  wheeling  to  the  left. 


SCHOOL    OF   THE    BATTERY.  135 

The  chiefs  of  the  otlier  sections  cause  them  to  be 
limbered  to  the  front;  and  while  limbering  they  com- 
mand: Caissons,  pass  your  pieces — trot — March.  When 
this  is  executed,  the  chief  of  the  centre  section  com- 
mands: Section  —  right  ivheel,  and  that  of  the  left: 
Forward. 

At  the  command  March,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of 
the  centre  and  left  sections,  these  sections  move  as 
ordered,  with  the  caissons  leading.  The  centre  sec- 
tion is  conducted  to  the  line  by  its  chief,  and  formed 
by  the  commands  Forward  and  In  battery.  The 
left  section  advances  five  yards,  and  is  conducted  to 
the  line  by  two  successive  right  half-wlieels.  It  is 
there  formed  in  like  manner  upon  the  alignment  of 
the  right  section. 

At  the  second  command  from  the  captain,  the  chief 
of  the  line  of  caissons  places  himself  in  prolongation 
of  the  line,  thirty-two  yards  on  the  right  of  the  right 
piece,  and  faces  to  the  front  to  mark  the  left  of  the 
new  line  of  caissons. 

When  the  pieces  are  too  heavy  to  bcf  wheeled  about 
or  moved  by  hand,  the  chiefs  of  sections  cause  them 
to  be  limbered  to  the  rear,  with  the  exception  of  the 
right  piece.  AVhilc  the  pieces  are  limbering,  the  chiefs 
of  the  centre  and  left  sections  cause  the  caissons  to 
pass  as  before;  and  all  the  chiefs  of  sections  give  the 
cautionary  command  for  their  pieces  to  wheel  about. 
At  the  command  March,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of 
sections,  the  pieces  are  wheeled  about,  and  the  sec- 
tions conducted  to  the  new  line  by  the  appropriate 
commands.  The  caisson  of  the  left  piece  of  the  right 
section  takes  its  place  in  the  same  manner  as  when  its 
piece  is  moved  by  hand. 

The  pivot  piece  recommences  firing  as  soon  as  it  is 


136  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY. 

unmasked  J  and  the  others  when  they  arrive  on  the 


line. 

rv 


The  change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  right,  right  wing 
forward,  is  executed  according  to  the  sainc  principles, 
aiul  by  inverse  means. 

Change  of  Front  to  Fire  to  the  Left,  Left  AYing. 

TO  THE  JtEAR,  AND  THE  KeVERSE. 

Wlien  the  battery  is  firing,  if  the  captain  wishes  to 
make  a  ]>erpendicular  change  of  front  to  fire  to  the 
left,  throwing  the  left  wing  to  the  rear,  he  causes  the 
firing  to  cease,  and  commands : 

L  Fire  to  the  left.     2.   Change  front  to  the  rear  on  the 
right  piece.     8.  March. 

At  the  second  command  the  chief  of  the  right  sec- 
tion places  the  right  piece  in  the  new  direction,  by 
causino;  the  trail  to  be  moved  to  the  rio-ht.  He  also 
causes  the  left  piece  of  his  section  to  be  moved  to  the 
rear  by  hand  ^nd  established  on  the  new  line.  The 
limbers  and  caissons  of  these  pieces  move  at  once  to 
the  right,  obliquing  sufficiently  to  place  themselves  in 
rear  of  their  respective  pieces,  and  take  their  places 
by  wheeling  or  reversing  to  the  left. 

The  other  chiefs  of  sections  command:  Limber  to 
the  rear;  and  immediately  afterward  :  Caissons,  in  front 
of  your  pieces  —  t?'ot  —  March.  The  caissons  place 
themselves  in  front  of  their  pieces  while  they  are 
limbering,^  and  halt.  The  chief  of  the  centre  section 
then  commands:  Section  —  left  wheel;  that  of  the  left 
section  :  Section — forioard. 

The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  places  himself  in 
the  prolongation  of  the  line  thirty-two  yards  on  thie 


imm^m^y.-rnf-.fmM^'K-^mmrm  ■  %^ 


SCHOOL  OF  THK  BATTERY.  137 


right  piece,  and  faces  to  the  rear  to  ini'.rk  the  right  of 
the  new  line  of  caissons. 

At  the  command  March,  given  b}-  tlie  captain,  and 
repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  the  centre  and  left  sections, 
those  sections  are  put  in  motion  and  phiced  in  battery 
on  the  line,  the  chief  of  the  left  section  wheeling  it 
to  the  left  when  it  is  opposite  its  position. 

"When  the  pieces  are  too  heavy  to  be  moved  by 
hand,  the  chief  of  the  right  section  causes  his  left 
piece  to  be  limbered  to  the  rear  with  the  rest,  and 
then  commands:  Jyfff  wheel.  At  the  command  March, 
repeated  by  this  chief,  the  piece  wheels  to  the  left, 
and  is  conducted  by  him  to  its  place  by  the  commands 
Forward — Ln  battery.  The  caisson  takes  its  place 
as  before  described. 

The  pivot  piece  recommences  firing  as  soon  as  it  is 
unmasked;  and  the  others  when  they  arrive  on  the 
line. 

The  change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  right,  right  wing- 
to  the  rear,  is  executed  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples, and  by  inverse  means. 

Cha.ngk  of  Front  to  Firk  to  thk  Right,  Left  Win(4 
TO  the  Keak,  and  the  Keverse. 

Figure  72.  When  the  battery  is  firing,  it'  the  cap- 
tain wishes  to  make  a  perpendicular  change  of  front 
to  fire  to  the  right,  throwing  the  left  wing  to  the  rear, 
he  discontinues  firing,  and  commands  : 

1.  Fire  to  the  right.     2.   Chaiuje  front  to  the  rear  on  the 
right  piece.     3.  March. 

At  the  second  command  the  chief  of  the  right  sec- 
tion commands:  Limbers,  and  caissions,  in  rear  of  your 
pieces  —  trot  —  March.      The    limbers    and    caissons 
12 


138  SCHOOL  OF  thk  rattf.ry. 

oblique  to  the  ri^ht,  and  pass  their  pieces,  with  the 
limbers  leading.  As  soon  as  the  limbers  have  passed, 
they  wheel  twice  to  the  left  and  cover  their  pieces. 
The  caissons  pass  their  limbers  and  cover  them  in  like 
manner.  The  chief  of  the  section  causes  the  trail  of 
his  rii^ht  piece  to  be  moved  to  the  left,  and  his  left 
piece  to  be  placed  upon  the  new  alignment  by  hand. 

The  chiels  of  the  other  sections  command  :  Limber 
TO  THK  RKAR,  and  Caissous,  in  rear  to  your  pieces — trot 
— -March.  "When  this  is  executed,  they  command : 
Forward. 

At  the  second  command  the  chief  of  the  line  of 
caissons  places  himself  on  the  left  of  the  right  piece 
of  the  centre  section,  facing  to  the  rear,  to  mark  the 
left  of  the  new  line  of  caissons. 

At  the  command  March,  from  the  captain,  repeated 
by  the  chiefs  of  the  centre  and  li'i't  sections,  those 
sections,  as  well  as  the  limbers  and  caissons  of  the 
first,  are  established  upon  the  new  line. 

When  the  piece  can  not  be  moved  by  hand,  the 
chief  of  the  right  section  causes  his  left  piece  to  be 
limbered  like  the  rest;  and  then  causes  the  remaining 
limber  and  the  caissons  to  pass  as  before  described. 
When  the  piece  is  limbered,  he  commands:  Jjcft  wheel. 
At  the  command  March,  from  the  captain,  repeated 
by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  the  piece  is  wheeled  and 
conducted  to  its  place  on  the  line. 

The  pivot  piece  recommences  firing  as  soon  as  it  is 
placed  in  tlie  new  direction  ;  and  the  others  as  they 
arrive  on  the  line. 

The  change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  left,  right  wing 
to  the  rear,  is  executed  according  to  the  same  prin- 
cipjes,  and  by  inverse  means. 


SCHOOL    OF    THK*  RATTERV.  139 


To  Pass  a   Df.fu.k  in   Front. 

When  the  buttory  is  firing,  to  pass  a  defile  in  front 
of  tlic  rin:ht  section,  the  captain  commands: 

1.    To  thr  front — by  the  right  section — pax^i  the  defile. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  eonnnand  the  chief  of  tlic  right  section 
^discontinues  firing,  limbers  his  piece  to  tiie  front,  and 
commands:  Forward.  At  the  command  March,  re- 
peated by  this  chief,  who  also  commands  Guide  left, 
the  section  moves  forward,  passes  the  defile,  and  is 
again  estaldished  in  battery,  and  the  firing  com- 
menced by  his  command. 

When  the  pieces  are  too  heavy  to  be  wlieeled  about 
by  hand,  the  chief  of  the  section  causes  them  to  be 
limbered  to  the  rear,  wheeled  about,  and  the  caissons 
closed,  before  giving  the  command  Forward. 

As  soon  as  the  right  section  commences  firing,  the 
centre  is  put  in  motion  in  like  manner.  Its  chief 
conducts  it  through  the  defile  by  successive  wheels, 
and  forms  it  into  battery  in  line  with  the  first. 

As  soon  as  the  C(;ntre  section  commences  tiring,  the 
left  ])asses  in  like  manner. 

AVhile  one  section  is  passing  the  defile,  the  others 
e(^ntinue  firing:  care  being  taken  not  to  injure  tlu» 
section  in  advance. 

When  the  defile  is  in  front  of  the  left  section,  it  is 
passed  accoi'ding  to  the  same  ])rinciples,  commencing 
with  that  section. 

When  the  defile  is  in  front  of  the  centre  section,  it 
is  passed  according  to  the  same  principles,  commenc- 
ing with  that  section,  and  by  the  commands:    To  tin: 
front  —  by  the  centre  neetion — pas.s  the  defile — March. 


14U  SCIIOUli    or    Tllfc    RATTERV. 

Unless  there  is  fiomc  reason  to  the  contrary,  the  right 
section  will  pass  l)ofbre  the  lett. 

When  the  flank  or  oblique  mareh  is  better  suited  to 
the  nature  of  the  ground,  the  chiefs  of  sections  will 
give  the  required  commands. 

When  the  defile  will  admit  but  one  piece  at  a  time, 
the  sections  arc  broken  by  their  chiefs  in  such  a  man- 
ner as  to  cause  the  nearest  piece  to  enter  first.  The 
flections  are  reformed  by  their  chiefs  immediately 
after  passing  the  detlle. 

To  Pass  a  J)kfilk  in   Rear. 

When  the  battery  Is  firing,  to  pass  a  defile  in  rear 
of  the  centi'e  section,  the  captain  commands  : 

(.    To  the  rear-^bif  the  right  seetioi) — pass  the  dejjle. 
2.  March. 

At  the  first  command  the  chief  of  the  right  section 
discontinues  firing,  the  limbers  to  the  rear,  and  com- 
mands: CaissojiS,  left  about — pieces,  forward.  At  the 
command  March,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  right 
section,  the  caissons  of  that  section  execute  the  about, 
and  the  pieces  close  to  their  ])roper  distance  at  a  trot. 
As  soon  as  the  about  is  completed,  the  chief  com- 
hiands:  Forwarh — (rKide  left,  conducts  the  suction 
througii  Tiie  delilc  by  successive  \\heels,  and  forms^it 
into  batteiy  in  ivar  of  its  tirst  ])(>sition. 

The  left  section  is  ])iit  in  motion  as  soon  as  the 
right  eominences  tiring,  ft  is  conducted  through  the 
deiile  by  its  chief,  and  formed  into  battery  in  rear  of 
its  first  position,  by  ihe  ])rinciples  already  described. 

The  centre  section  moves  as  soon  as  the  left  com- 
mences tiring.  It  is  formed  into  battery  in  rear  of  its 
first  j>osition,  nnd  in  lino  -Nvitli  the  other  two  sectionb. 


,,  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTERY.  14t 

The  passage  of  the  defile  may  be  executed,  com- 
mencing with  the  left  section,  according  to  the  same 
principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

When  the  defile  is  in  rear  of  one  of  the  flanks,  the 
movement  should  commence  with  the  other.  It  should 
always  end  by  passing  the  section  or  piece  covering 
the  defile. 

When  the  detiie  will  admit  but  one  piece  at  a  time, 
the  sections  are  broken  by  tlieir  chiefs  in  such  a  man- 
ner as  to  cause  the  piece  farthest  from  the  defile  to 
enter  first;  and  the  sections  are  again  formed  as  soon 
as  possible  after  leaving  the  defile. 

Parade  tor  Review  and  Inspection. 

The  battery  being  in  line,  with  the  pieces  in  front ; 
the  first  sergeant  /'?i*o  yards  from  the  right;  the  bugler 
and  guidon  in  one  rank,  5Lr  yards  on  his  right;  the 
quartermaster-sergeant  two  yards  from  the  left;  the 
artificers  in  one  rank,  si;r  yards  on  his  left;  all  dressed 
on  the  lead-drivers  of  pieces;  the  captain  commands: 

1.  Attention.    2.  Prepare /or  review,   o.  Action  front. 
4.   Right  Dress.     5.   Front. 

At  the  third  command  the  battery  is  formed  as 
directed;  the  chiefs  of  sections  take  their  places  in 
the  centres  of  the  sections,  three  yards  in  Iront  of  the 
line  of  muzzles;  and  the  chiefs  of  pieces,  without  dis- 
mounting, take  their  places  at  their  posts,  i/i  battery. 
The  non-commissioned  staff,  buglers,  guidon,  and-Jirtifi- 
cers  reverse  wMth  their  limbers,  and  take  their  places, 
in  the  order  already  directed,  on  a  line  with  the  lead- 
drivers;  the  cannoneers  are  at  their  posts. 

At  the  fourth  command  the  battery  is  aligned — the 
chiefs  of  the  sections,  the  pieces,  and  the  limbers  by 


142  SCHOOL    OF    THE    RATT-KRY. 

the  captain  ;  and  the  caissons  by  the  chief  of  the  line 
of  caissons. 

At  tlio  fifth  command,  given  by  the  captain  wlien 
the  alignment  is  completed,  the  chief  of  the  line  of 
caissons  takes  this  position  in  battery.  The  captain 
then  commands: 

Drair, — sabrp:s. 

This  is  executed  by  the  staff  sergeants,  chiefs  of 
pieces,  and  artificers  only;  and  the  captain  takes  post 
twelve  yards  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  batteiy 
(eight  yards,,  if  there  are  two  or  more  batteries  in  line), 
faces  to  the  front,  and  awaits  the  approach  of  the  re- 
viewing officer. 

When  the  reviewing  officer  is  niidway  between  the 
camp-color  and  the  captain,  the  latter  reverses  to  the 
right,  and  commands  : 

Present — sabrks. 

He  immediately  resumes  his  front  and  salutes,  as 
do  all  whose  sabres  are  drawn ;  and  the  music  plays 
according  to  the  rank  of  the  reviewing  officer. 

The  reviewing  officer  having  halted,  and  acknowl- 
edged the  salute,  the  captain  brings  his  sword  to  a 
carry,  reverses  as  before,  and  commands  : 

Carry — sabres. 

He  immediate!}' resumes  his  front;  the  reviewing 
officer  turns  off  to  the  right  of  the  battery,  passes 
along  its  frojit,  and  returns  to  the  right  b}''  passing- 
bet  ween  the  lines  of  carriages,  or  in  rear  of  the 
caisson. 

While  the  reviewing  officer  is  passing  around  the 
battery,  the  music  plays.  It  ceases  when  he  turns  off 
to  take  his  post  at  the  camp-color. 


'^'''  SOirOOL    OF    THE    BATTERY.  143 

When  lljo  music  ceases,  the  captain  faces  the  bat- 
tery, and  commands  : 

Ltmbkr  to  the  Front, 
and  all  assume  their  places  in  line. 

The  reviewing  officer  having  taken  a  position  near 
the  camp-color,  the  captain  causes  the  cannoneers  to 
mount,  and  breaks  the  battery  into  cohimn  of  sections 
to  the  right  by  the  usual  commands. 

He  then  commands  : 

Pa-'iS  in  Review, 

and  puts  the  column  in  march,  at  a  walk,  with  the 
guide  to  the  right. 

The  captain  then  places  himself  at  the  head  of  the 
column,  Jour  j-ards  in  advance  of  the  chief  of  the 
leading  section;  the  trumpeters  or  buglers  march 
four  yards  in  advance  of  the  captain  ;  the  chief  of  the 
line  of  cais.sons  outside  the  column,  opposite  the 
centre,  axiiX  four  yards  ivowx  the  left  flank;  the  first 
sergeant  and  quartermaster-sergeant  outside  the  col- 
umn, /bnr  yards  from  the  left  flank,  the  former  abreas-t 
the  lead -drivers  of  the  leading  section,  the  latter 
abreast  the  lead-drivers  of  the  rear  section  ;  the  artifi- 
cers in  one  rank,  four  yards  in  rear  of  the  cohimn  ; 
the  guidon  at  the  side  of  the  chief  of  the  directino- 
piece. 

When  the  head  of  the  column  has  arrived  within 
forty  yards  of  the  reviewing  officer  the  music  begins 
to  play,  and  as  soon  as  the  latter  has  ])assed  it  wheels 
out  of  the  column  to  a  position  in  front  of  the  i-evicM'- 
ing  officer,  where  it  faces  him,  and  continues  to  play 
until  the  column  has  passed.  It  then  ceases,  follows 
in  rear  of  the  battery,  and  resumes  its  place  at  the 
head  of  the  column  after  the  next  change  of  direction. 


144  .SCHOOL  or  thk  battery.  i^ 

All  the  officers  isalute  in  succession  as,  they  arrive 
within  six  yards  of  the  reviewing  officer,  casting  their 
eyes  toward  him  at  the  same  time,  and  bringing  their 
sabres  to  a  carry  after  having  passed  him  s/a;  yards. 
As  soon  as  the  captain  has  saluted,  he  places  himself 
on  the  left  of  the  reviewing  officer,  passing  by  his 
rear,  remains  until  the  battery  has  passed,  and  then 
rejoins  it,  again  passing  by  the  rear. 

The  column  is  so  conducted  as  to  march  parallel  to 
the  line  on  which  the  battery  is  to  form,  and  far 
enouirh  in  its  rear  to  enable  the  column  to  wheel  into 
line.  It  is  then  wheeled  into  line,  formed  in  battery, 
and  the  review^  terminated  by  a  salute  as  at  the  begin- 
ning. 

When  instructions  have  been  previously  given  to 
pass  a  second  time,  either  at  a  trot  or  gallop,  it  will 
be  done  before  wheeling  into  line,  the  officers  passing 
the  second  time  without  saluting. 

At  the  command  Close  order,  instead  of  limbering 
to  the  front,  the  captain  commands : 

1'.  Limber  to  the  euont.  2.  Pieces,  left  about — Caisso7is, 
forward.     3.  March.     4.   Battery — Halt. 

These  commands  are  executed,  and  the  pieces  halt 
with  their  lead-drivers  on  a  line  with  the  other  troops. 

After  passing  in  review,  and  reaching  the  ground 
on  whiclx  it  is  to  form,  the  battery  may  be  wheeled  by 
section  to  the  right,  and,  after  gaining  the  necessary 
distance  to  the  rear,  countermarched,  and  established 
on  the  line. 

When  a  battery  is  to  march  past  in  line  or  in  column 
of  half-batteries,  it  will  be  done  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples already  described.  In  line,  the  officers,  etc., 
will  bo  at  their  usual  posts,    hi  column  of  half-batteries, 


SCHOOL    OF   THE    BATTERY.  145 

the  captain  will  be  two  yards  in  advance  of  the  cliiet 
of  the  leading  half-battery;  each  chief  of  half-battery 
two  yards  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  command;  the 
chief  of  the  centre  section  on  the  left  of  the  leading 
half-battery, /owr  yards  from  its  centre,  and  the  chief 
of  the  line  of  caissons  in  the  same  position  with  re- 
spect to  the  rear  half-battery. 

In  eight-gun  batteries,  when  the  column  is  formed 
by  half-  battery,  the  chiefs  of  sections  who  do  not 
command  half- batteries  retain  their  places  in  their 
sections. 

The  buglers  arc  four  yards  in  front  of  the  captain. 
The  first  sergeant  and  quartermaster-sergeant  are  out- 
side the  column  of  hall-batteries, /owr  yards  from  the 
left  flank,  the  former  abreast  the  lead-driver  of  the 
leading,  the  latter  abreast  the  lead-driver  of  the  rear 
half-battery,  the  artificers  in  one  rank,  four  yards  in 
rear  of  the  column,  the  guidon  at  the  side  of  the  chief 
of  the  directing  piece. 

Officers'  Salute  with  the  Sabre. 

When  the  officers  arc  to  salute,  whether  on  horse- 
back or  on  foot,  at  a  halt  or  in  march,  they  execute  it 
in  four  motions : 

1st.  At  six  yards  from  the  person  to  be  saluted, 
raise  the  sabre  perpendicularly,  the  point  upward, 
edge  to  the  left,  the  hand  opposite  to  and  one  foot 
from  the  right  shoulder,  the  wrist  six  inches  from  the 
body. 

2d.  Lower  the  blade,  extending  the  arm  to  its  full 
length,  the  hand  in  quarts,  until  the  point  of  the  sabre 
is  near  the  foot. 

3d.  Eaise  the  sabre  quickly,  the  point  upwdrd  as  in 
13 


/ 


14C  scuooL  or   rn>;  uattkuy. 

the    !irst   motion,  nt'ter  ihe  person   saluted  is  pussed 
fcfur  vards. 

4tb.  Bi-ing  the  .subi-c  to  c:irrv. 

Inspection. 

The    battorieK   oi'  Held    artillery   will    alwaj's,   for 
infjpeetion.  bo  formed  either  in  line  or  in  battery. 

The  knapfsacks  of  the  cannoneers  are  strapped  on 
the  foot-boards  of  the  ammunition-ehests.  IJ'  the  in- 
spector winhtis  to  examine  the  clothing  of  the  men  on 
the  field,  the  knapsacks  and  valises  will  be  unstrapped, 
laid  at  the  feet  of  the  men,  and  opened,  the  drivers 
being  dismounted  for  the  purpose. 


THi:    COMPANY    DISMOUNT  KI).  i-i' 


P  A  H  T     T  n  I  R  T>  . 

TIIK  COMPANY   OISMOUNTRI). 


Formation  or  tue  Company. 

Figure  73.  Id  tlio  iirtillery.  as  no  two  inovi  of  a 
piece,  cannoneers  or  drivers,  perform  the  sjinie  duties, 
each  should  be  specially  assigned  to  that  position  for 
which  he  is  best  fitted. 

The  men,  whether  cannoneers  or  drivers,  are  per- 
manently attached  to  the  pieces,  and  will  not  bo 
transJerred  except  by  order  oi^  the  captain,  or  tem- 
porarily to  equalize  detachments  on  drill  or  parade. 

The  cannoneers  assigned  to  tlie  seiwice  of  a  irun 
constitute  a  gim  detacJtincnt,  and  are  commanded  by 
the  gunner.  When  the  company  is  paraded,  di»-. 
mounted,  these  detachments  fall  in  each  on  the  right 
of  the  men  of  its  piece  —  the  cannoneers  taking  their 
places  according  to  their  numbers  in  the  detachment. 

When  the  cannoneers  and  drivers  attached  to  a 
piece  are  assembled  in  rank  and  file  formation,  they 
constitute  a  j9^a(foo?(!,  which  is  commanded  by  the  ser- 
geant, who  is  chief  of  the  piece.  The  drivers  form  on 
the  left,  and  the  platoon  is  divided  into  detachments 
of  the  same  size  as  the  gun  detachment,  the  men 
being  numbered  in  the  same  mannoi*. 

Two  platoons  constitute  a  section^  which  is  com- 
manded by  a  lieutenant. 

The  Mmpany  is   composed  of  two,  three,  or  io\xr 


148  THE    COMPANY    DISMOUNTED. 

sections.  The  instruction  laid  down  is  applicable  in 
cither  case,  but  is  given  for  three  sections.  When 
there  are  four  sections,  the  compan}^  is  further  divided 
ill  to  divisions,  each  composed  of  two  sections,  and 
commanded  by  its  ranking  chief  of  section.  The 
company  will  not  be  mancBuvred  by  divisons  unless 
circumstances  require  it,  the  section  or  platoon  being 
the  most  convenient  subdivision  for  manoeuvring. 

The  company  is  commanded  by  a  captain.  A  sub- 
altern, in  addition  to  the  chiefs  of  sections,  is  attached 
to  it.  He  performs  the  staff  duties  of  the  battery, 
and  commands  the  line  of  caissons  in  the  battery 
formations.  In  addition  to  the  platoons,  there  should 
be  attached  to  the  company  one  sergeant-major  or  first 
sergeant ;  one  quartermaster-sergeant;  two  buglers  or 
trumpeters;  one  guidon;  and  such  number  of  artificers 
as  the  service  of  the  battery  ma}''  require.  In  the 
absence  of  the  lieutenant,  chief  of  the  line  of  Cais- 
sons,  he  is  i-eplaced  by  the  first  sergeant. 

The  platoons  form  when  in  line  in  the  order  of 
■tTieir  pieces  in  park,  and  touching  each  other. 

The  two  forming  a  section  are  designated  as  the 
right  anrl  left  platoons,  according  to  their  actual 
positions  with  reference  to  each  other  in  the  sections. 

When  necessary,  surplus  men  may  be  transferred 
from  one  platoon  to  another,  so  that  there  shall  be 
but  one  incomplete  detachment  in  the  company,  which 
should  not  be  on  the  flank.  When  an  incomplete 
detachment  consists  of  an  odd  number  of  men,  the 
vacancy  is  left  in  the  rear  rank,  in  the  next  file  but 
one  from  the  left,  that  number  being  omitted  in  call- 
ing off. 

To  prevent  the  formation  of  incomplete  detach- 
ments, artificers  may  he  assigned  as  No.  8;  or  the 


THE    COMPANY   DISMOUNTED.  149 

permanent  chiefs  of  caissons  may  be  assigned  as  gun- 
ners to  detachments  other  tlian  the  gun  detaclimei't, 
and  posted  one  yard  behind  the  right  files. 

When  the  company  is  formed  for  parade  purposes, 
and  it  is  not  desired  to  manoeuvre  b}"  detachmenis, 
the  platoons  wiixy  be  equalized,  and  regarded  as  the 
units.  The}"  are  then  formed  as  single  detachments, 
the  chiefs  of  the  caissons  being  posted  as  the  front 
rank  men  of  the  left  files  of  the  platoons.  The  men 
call  off'  from  No.  1  to  No.  8,  as  if  divided  into  dC' 
taclnnents  of  eight  men  each. 

The  sections  are  designated  according  to  their  ac- 
tual positions  in  line,  as  the  rlgkt,  the  centre,  and  the 
Left  sections.  If:  there  are  four,  they  are  designated 
according  to  actual  position,  as  the  right,  the  riglit- 
centre,  the  left-centre,  and  the  left  sections. 

When  the  company  consists  of  four  sections,  the 
right  and  right-centre  sections  constitute  the  right 
division ;  the  left  and  left-centre  sections,  the  left 
division. 

None  of  the  designations  of  the  platoons  in  a  sec- 
tion, nor  of  sections  and  divisions  in  the  company, 
are  permanent.  They  shift  from  one  to  the  other, 
according  to  the  actual  positions  of  the  subdivisione 
with  reference  to  each  other. 


Posts  of  the  Officers,  Non-Com missioned  Officers. 

ETC. 

Figures  73  and  74.  The  captain  commanding  goes 
wherever  his  presence  may  be  necessary  or  his  com- 
mands best  heard.  His  position  is,  in  the  order  in  line, 
four  yards  in  front  of  the  eenti-e  of  the  company;  in 
the  order  in  column,  or  when  faced  by  a  flank,  four 


3*ards  outside  tlie  msirchin^  rinnk.  opposite  the  centre 
of  tlie  company. 

The  lieutenants  commandino;  sections,  in  line  or  ?n 
column  of  sections,  are  two  yard^  in  front  of  the  centres 
of  tlieir  respective  sectir)nH;  in  columns  of  platoons  or 
of  detachments,  or  when  faced  by  a  fiank^  they  are  txoo 
yards  outside  the  n\arching  flank,  and  opposite  the 
centres  of  their  respective  secrtions  ;  cxi-ept  that,  Avhen 
faced  by  a  Jiank,  the  cliief  of  the  lendinpj  section  takes 
his  phice  at  tlie  side  of  the  leading  file. 

In  cohimn  of  divisions,  the  ranking  chief  of  section 
in  each  division  mfour  yards  in  front  of  the  centre 
of  his  division;  the  other  chief  of  section  keeps  his 
position  of  two  yards  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his 
section. 

The  lieutenant,  chief  of  caissons,  is,  in  line,  four 
yards  hehind  the  centre  of  the  company;  in  column,  or 
jac^xl  by  a  fiank,  he  is  four  yards  outside  of  the  pivot 
flank,  and  opposite  the  centre  of  the  company. 

The  sergeants,  chiefs  of  pieces,  when  in  line,  in  col- 
umn of  sections,  or  faced  by  a  flank,  are  on  the  right  of 
the  gun  detachments  of  their  respective  ]-)latoons,  in 
the  front  rank.  In  column  of  platoons,  or  of  detach- 
ments, they  are  one  yard  in  front  of  the  centre  of  their 
platoons  or  of  their  gun  detachments. 

The  corporals,  gunners,  when  in  line,  or  column  of 
sections,  are  one  yard  behind  the  right  flies  of  their 
respective  gun  detachments.  In  columns  of  platoons, 
or  detachments,  they  are  on  the  right  of  the  gun  de- 
tachments. When  the  column  has  a  detachment, 
other  than  the  gun  detachment,  at  its  head,  the  gun- 
ner of  the  platoon  to  which  it  belongs  will  place 
himself  one   vard   in   front  of   its  centre,   unless  the 


chief  of  caisson  of  that  piece  is  acting  uk  its  tile- 
closer;  in  which  case  the  iutter  leadH  the  cohimn. 
When  faced  by  a  flank,  they  face  with  the  company, 
and  keep  their  rehitive  positions. 

Tlie  corporals,  chiefs  of  caissons,  are  in  their  places 
in  (he  i-anks  as  Nor.  8  of  the  gun  detachments,  or  as 
the  front  rank  men  on  tlie  left  of  their  platoons,  or 
they  may  be  assigned  as  gunners  to  detachments, 
other  than  the  gun  detachments,  in  the  case  already 
})rovided  for,  to  prevent  the  formation  of  incomplete 
detachments. 

The  first  sergeant,  in  line,  is  on  the  right,  of  the 
company,  in  a  line  with  the  front  rank,  and  o?if  yard 
Irom  it;  in  column,  he  is  on  the  marching  flank,  one 
yard  outside  the  section,  or  other  subdivision,  nearest 
to  him  when  in  line.  When  faced  by  a  flanks  he  faces 
with  the  company. 

The  quartermaster-sergeant  occupies  positions  on 
the  left  of  the  company,  cori*esponding  to  those  of  the 
tirst  sergeant  on  the  right,  whether  in  line,  in  cohinm, 
or  faced  by  a  flank. 

The  buglers  or  trumpeters,  in  line,  are  on  the  right 
of  the  first  sergeant,  in  one  rank,  and  two  vards  from 
})im  ;  in  colunm,  they  arc  nix  yards  in  front  or  rear  of 
the  subdivision  next  them  in  line,  according  as  th.ut 
subdivision  forms  tlu?  Iiead  or  rear  of  the  column. 
When  the  company  taces  by  flank  they  face  with  it. 

The  artificers  occupy  positions  on  the  leil  of  th'» 
company  corresponding  to  those  of  the  musicians  on 
the  right,  whether  in  line,  in  column,  or  faced  by  a 
flank. 

The  guidon  tbrms  with  the  musicians,  and  on  their 
left,  or  tukes  such  position  a>»  the  captain  may  pre- 
'^(.•ribe. 


162  Tftfe   COMPANY   DISMOUNTED. 


When,  in  the  movements  or  manoeuvres,  the  sub- 
divisions originally  on  the  right  and  left  become  thosa 
of  the  left  and  right,  the  non-commissioned  staff, 
musicians,  and  artificers  remain  with  the  subdivisions 
near  which  they  were  originally"  formed,  and  take 
forrosponding  positions  in  line,  etc. 


.■■it.t»'.t: :  ..V  .>^j"6iitM2^fi!tri'.:v' 


■''*' 


APPENDIX 


War  Organization  of  a  Mounted  Battery  of  Four 

AND  Six  Guns. 


Captains 

Lieutenants.  • . 

Staff  Sergeants 


Sergeants.. 
Corporals.. 
Guidons. .  . 
Artificers  . . 
Buglers  . . . 
Drivers. . . . 
Cannoneers 
Spare 


Total. 


4  PfKC 

KS. 

6  Pieces. 

n 

CO 

CO 

K 

tn 

f. 

ei 

ii 

a 

w 

o 

o 

o 

S 

a 

o 

S 

* 

] 

.. 

.. 

1 

3 

■' 

•• 

4 

•• 

•• 

•• 

2 

2 

•• 

2 

2 

4 

.  4 

6 

6 

!  .. 

8 

, , 

12 

. , 

] 

1 

1 

1 

•:::-4 

4 

*6 

6 

2 

2 

2 

2 

1   . . 

40 

60 

52 

84 

1  .. 

40 

70 

•• 

8 

10 

1     4 

1 

101 

81 

5 

151 

1 

111 

. .  Chiefs  of  Sections  and  Cais- 
sons. 

Sergeant-Major,  or  1st  Serg't 
and  Quartermaster-Serg't. 

Chiefs  of  Pieces. 

Gunners  and  Chiefs  of  Cais- 
sons. 


By  order  Adjfc.  and  Inspect.«ir- 
Gen'l,  No.81  (Nov.  1,  1862j, 
the  number  of  privates  is 
from  65  to  125 — the  number 
of  enlisted  men  should  be 
not  lesn  than  25  to  each  gun, 
i.  e.,  100  for  a  four-gun,  and 
150  for  a  six-gun  battery. 


•^=By  order  Adjutant  and  Inspector-General,  No.81  (Noveinber  1,  1862).  only  2 
artificers  for  any  battery  allowed — entirely  insufficient. 

Number  and  Application  of  Horses  required  for  a 
Mounted  Battery  of  Four  and  Six  Guns. 


{Battery  of  Manoeuvre . 
Forge 
Battery  Wagon 

Spare  additional,  1-12 

Sergeants' 

Artificers' 

Buglers' 

Guidon's ^  .. . , 

Spare 

Total 


4  Pieces. 

6  PjECES. 

48 

72 

6 

6 

6 

6 

5 

7 

6 

8 

4* 

6* 

2 

2 

1 

1 

3 

•3 

81 

111 

*Only  2  artificers  at  preseut  allowed  by  order  No.  81,  Adjutant  and  luspector- 
Oeucral. 


Description  of  Artillery  Hoksks,  ami  How  to 
Preserve  them. 

They  should  be  well  {jroken,  perfectly  sound,  with 
full  chetits,  broad  shoulders,  short  coupled  with  ful} 
barrels,  able  to  move  by  their  weight  on  the  collar 
say  i'roni  one  thousand  thirteen  hundred  pounds,  deep 
loins,  full  hind  quarters — in  other  words,  active,  pony- 
built,  eonijiact  horses,  not  less  than  five,  nor  raore 
than  ten  years  old,  and  from  fifteen  and  a  half  to  six- 
teen hands  hig'h.  Xarrow  chested,  long  legged,  long 
bodied,  and  vicious  horses  are  unlit  for  artillery  pur- 
poses. They  should  not  bo  required  to  pull  mor^^ 
than  seven  hundred  pounds  to  the  horse. 

The  i'vQe  use  of  the  wisj),  brush,  and  (nirry-combv 
regularly  applied,  twice  daily,  for  at  least  thirty 
minutes,  will,  with  even  a  short  allowance  of  food,  drv 
more  toward  keeping  a  horse  in  good  order  than  lull 
feeding  without.  A  folded  blanket,  or  «  moss  blanket, 
adapting  itself  to  the  shape  of  the  saddle  and  con- 
dition of  the  horse,  is  the  best  preventive  of  sore 
backs.  When  wiinn,  they  should  not  be  watered 
until  rubbed  drv,  and  from  buckets  ratboi*  than  from 
a.  stream,  and  uevor  from  a  well,  without  allowing 
the  water  to  stand,  and  then  give  a  few  swallows  at  a 
lime,  li!  it  can  be  had,  give  a  cpiart  of  meal  with  a 
little  salt  to  the  bucket  of  water. 

The  folio wiiig  directions  hh  to  gix>oniing,  taker* 
irom  a  w<;i'k  by  a  Board  of  United  States  ai-tillerv 
olHcers,  have  been  found  to  be  full  and  complele  : 

"  The  wisp  is  to  be  used  Avhea  the  horse  comes  in 

warm  from  exercise,  and   the  h.oi*se  is  rubbed  until 

x\vy,  from  his  bind  quarters,  against  the  hair,  up  to 
1h3  head. 


APPENDIX.  Vlii 

"The  curry-comb  is  used  wlnni  the  horse  is  dry, 
beginning  tilwa^'S  on  the  near  side  at  the  hind  quar- 
ters, its  application  being  in  proportion  to  the  length 
and  foulness  oi'  the  coat;  that  is,  if  the  coat  is  close, 
being  full  of  dust,  and  very  filthy,  use  it  freely  to 
loosen  the  coat  or  the  sweat  that  is  dried  fast  on  the 
skin  and  roots  of  the  hair,  appearing  like  a  white, 
saltish  dust.  In  the  spring  the  curry-comb  should, 
while  the  coat  is  changing,  be  used  judiciously,  as  a 
removal  of  the  hair  too  rapidly  exposes  the  horse  to 
the  sudden  changes  of  temperature.  Proceeding  from 
the  hind  quarters,  descend  to  the  quarters,  minding 
not  to  scratch  or  injure  the  horse.  The  legs  below 
the  houghs  arc  not  to  bo  touched  with  the  curry- 
comb, unless  the  dirt  is  matted  on  the  joints  of  the 
hough,  which  mfty  be  carefully  loosened  with  the 
curry-comb.  The  comb  works  unpleasantly  on  that 
part,  and  must  be  handled  lightly,  ^ext  proceed  to 
the  fetlocks,  back,  loins,  Hank,  belly,  shoulders,  arms, 
chest,  and  neck,  on^itting  no  part  that  the  curiy-comb 
can  be  conveniently  applied  to;  but  tender  places, 
thin  of  hair,  or  rubbed  by  the  harness,  need  not  bo 
touched;  they  should  he  rubbed  with  the  wisp;  ob- 
serve, therefore,  to  begin  with  the  curry-comb  on  the 
near  hind  quarters  and  finish  with  th(^  head,  keeping 
the  conib  in  the  right  hand.  After  currying  the  near 
side,  proceed  with  the  opposite  side;  here  use  the  left 
hand;  this  done,  wisp  off  those  places  not  touched  by 
the  curry-comb;  then  use  the  brush.  Begin  first  at 
the  head  on  the  near  side,  taking  the  brush  in  the  left 
hand  and  the  curry-comb  in  the  right,  brushing  more 
particularly  those  parts  where  the  dust  is  more  apt  to 
lodge,  proceed  down  the  neck;  the  scui'f  of  the  neck, 
next  the  head,  and  the  scrag  next  the  mane  are  ditii-* 


156  APPENDIX. 

cult  to  clean.  Appl}^  the  brush  backward  and  forward 
on  these  places,  finishing  by  leaving  the  coat  smooth, 
<ilear  the  brush  from  dust  after  every  two  or  three 
.strokes  with  the  eurrj^-comb;  proceed  in  the  reverse 
order  used  by  the  curry-comb,  taking  in  those  parts 
not  touched  by  the  curr^^-comb,  viz :  under  the  chest 
between  the  forelegs,  the  inside  of  the  elbow  or  arm, 
and  the  parts  about  the  fetlocks — the  skin  under  the 
flank  and  the  hind  quarters  must  be  free  from  dust, 
soft,  and  so  clean  as  not  to  soil  a  white  cloth.  The 
curry-comb  begins  at  the  hind  quarters  and  ends  at 
the  head. 

"  The  brush  begins  at  the  head,  and,  taking  in  all 
parts  of  the  horse,  ends  at  the  quarters.  Horses 
should  alwaj^'s  be  groomed  at  the  picket-rope,  unless 
in  very  stormy  weather.  After  ^'ooming,  the  chief 
of  each  piece  inspects  his  horses,  exacting  that  the 
rules  relating  to  grooming  shall  have  been  obeyed — if 
passed  by  the  sergeant,  then  the  horses  of  each  piece 
to  be  led  up  successively  to  the  battery  officer  of  tl)e 
da}"  for  inspection.  Any  horse  not  passed  by  him 
should  be  taken  back  to  the  picket -rope,  and  the 
driver  made  to  groom  him  double  the  usual  time  in 
the  presence  of  the  sergeant  of  the  piece.  A  chest 
of  boxes  of  thin,  light  wood  may  be  carried  strapped 
on  the  foot-boards," 

Further  directions  for  the  care  and  preservation 
of  horses  will  be  found  in  the  standing  orders  to 
Andrews'  Artillery  Battalion. 

Great  care  should  be  given  to  the  fitting  of  collars 
and  saddles.  A  pad  or  piece  of  sheepskin  shoald  be 
used  near  the  spot  rubbed.  By  using  a  folded  blanket, 
or  moss  blanket,  and  by  proper  riding,  sore  backs 
tihould  be  a  rare  occurrence.     By  a  solution  of  alum- 


APPENDIX.  157 

vratcr,  the  nocks  and  backs  may  be  rendered  tough. 
Jlelieving  them  from  work,  castile  soap  and  wet  clotlis, 
with  cold  water,  will  soon  effect  a  cure  if  prompt  at- 
tention be  given  in  the  beginning.  Collars  should  be 
kept  soft  and  supple  by  cleaning,  oiling,  airing,  and 
beating  them.  Neatsfoot  oil  is  decidedly  the  best ; 
melted  lard  when  neatsfoot  oil  can  not  be  had. 


]n8  APrKNDix. 


Head-quarter8,  Andrews'  Battalion  Artillery, 
Milford  Station,  March  31,  1863. 

Standin^f  Orders  to  be  rigidly  enforced  by  company 
oliicers  of  batteries,  wlio  will  hv  hold  j-esponsiblo 
by  their  battalion  commander. 

it'o//  Calls  —  Beve'dlt.  —  lievcille  will  be  blown,  until 
further  orders,  at  a  quarter  before  six,  and  roll 
called  at  six  precisely;  commissioned  officers  and 
all  enlisted  men  are  required  to  be  present,  save 
the  following:  The  battery  officer  of  Vie  day  (who 
must  visit  the  guai'd  at  least  once  between  mid- 
night and  daylight,  and  not  divest  himself  of  his 
clothing),  and  those  on  guard  during  the  night. 

Sick  Calls  will  be  blown  at  half-past  seven  o'clock,  at 
battalion  head-quarters;  at  eight  o'clock,  the  first 
sergeant  will  be  present  at  head-quarters  with 
men  able  to  attend,  with  a  list  signed  by  officer 
in  command  of  company,  and  by  himself,  of  all 
persons  absent  from  calls  of  preceding  day  and 
reveille  call. 

Retreat  will  be  blown  at  a  quarter  before  six,  and  roll 
called  at  six  o'clock  —  at  least  one  commissioned 
officer  and  all  enlisted  men  are  required  to  be 
present. 
Taps  will  be  blown  at  nine  o'clock,  at  which  time  all 
officers  and  enlisted  men  must  be  in  quarters. 

Drill  Calls. — The  time  for  drill  call  may  be  selected 
by  officers  commanding  company;  they  must  drill 
at  least  two  hours  each  day  from  the  time  of 
assembling,  and  the  officer  commanding  battery 
will  notify  battalion  commander  an  to  the  honi*P 


selected — at  least  one  comuiisfiioned  officer  will 
bo  present  at  every  drill,  and  sec  that  the  non- 
commissioned officers  ])ro|)erly  instruct  the  men. 

Feeding^  Watr/ring,  and  Grooming.  —  Grain  will  be  fed 
twice  daily,  lono-  food  at  night;  .Hero;eants,  with 
drivers,  will  go  from  reveille  roll  call  directly  to 
the  stables,  and  feed.  After  fecdino;,  the  horsen 
will  be  led  to  the  picket- rope  and  thoroughly 
groomed.  Great  cai'e  must  be  given  to  rub  the 
legs,  joints,  and  under  the  fetlocks  dry,  to  avoid 
scratches,  and  grease  heel  —  captain  and  other 
officers  must  be  present,  except  the  batter}*  officer 
of  preceding  day  —  then  taken  to  and  from  water 
in  a  walk  by  twos  in  column,  accompanied  by 
the  battery  officer  of  the  day.  After  grooming, 
the  stables  will  be  cleaned  by  a  detail  for  the  pur- 
pose, under  charge  of  the  battery  otficer  of  tho 
day.  At  fonr  o'clock  stable  call  shall  be  blown, 
when  the  horses  will  be  taken  to  and  from  water 
by  twos  in  column,  accompanied  by  the  battery 
officer  of  the  day,  then  thoroughly  groomed  and 
then  fed;  each  time  they  must  be  groomed  at 
least  thirty  iniiiut€.<  to  each  horse,  and  then  in- 
spected by  the  battery  officer.  If  not  properly 
groomed,  hr.  will  cause  the  driver,  under  the 
direction  of  his  sergeant,  to  immediately  groom 
the  ho7'se  double  the  usual  time,  and  then  be 
brought  to  him  for  inspection. 

Harness.  —  Eacks  must  be  placed  for  harness  wheu- 
tver  one  day's  halt  is  made;  at  other  times,  it 
may  be  placed  on  foot-boards  and  tongues  of  car- 
riages, never  on  the  ground  —  care  must  be  taken 
to  keep  tho  harness  in  good  repair,  well  greased 
■with  neatsfoot  oil,  and  cleaned. 


160  APPENDIX. 

Horses  shall  not  be  tied  at  any  time  to  the  guns  or 
caissons.  A  light  picket-rope  (1-inch)  can  be  carried 
on  caisson  of  No.  1  gun.  Men  kicking,  or  striking 
with  buts  of  whips  their  horses,  must  be  severely 
punished,  and  each  case  reported  at  once,  with  char- 
acter of  person  and  punishment  to  the  battalion  com- 
mander. Baggage  must  not  be  placed  on  limbers  or 
caissons.  Cooking  utensils  and  blankets  must  be  car- 
ried on  the  company  wagon,  also  knapsacks,  or  on 
the  backs  of  men  ;  none  of  these  articles  shall  be  car- 
ried on  limbers  or  caissons.  iJsTo  lounging  or  careless 
riding  to  be  allowed,  and  drivers  to  be  required  to 
dismount  at  halts  on  marches.  When  artillery  is 
marching  with  infantry,  no  watering  must  be  allowed 
on  the  march.  Pole  props  not  to  be  allowed  to  hang 
loose,  but  to  be  placed  when  halted.  Ammunition 
when  expended  to  be  without  delay  replaced  by  requisi- 
tion on  ordnance  officer.  To  be  carefully  sunned 
daily  when  practicable,  and  any  defective  ammunition 
to  be  at  once  reported  in  writing.  After  an  action,  a 
report  to  be  at  once  made,  giving  full  particulars  as  to 
the  number  of  rounds  fired,  also  the  number  of  men 
and  horses  killed  and  wounded,  together  with  the 
names  of  any  commissioned  officers  or  enlisted  men 
who  shall  have  been  conspicuous  for  gallantry  or  the 
reverse.  It  will  not  always  be  possible  in  a  campaign 
to  observe  the  hours  appointed,  or  literally  obey  some 
of  the  duties  enjoined.  But  the  spirit  of  them  must 
be  obeyed.  It  is  expected  that  commissoned  and 
non-commissioned  officers  shall  make  themselves  thor- 
oughly conversant  with  their  duties,  and,  as  far  as 
practicable,  with  those  of  grade  next  above  them. 


APPENDIX.  1(3] 


IIi;ai)-Quarti:k6  Ukpaktaiknt  Xorthiikn  Virginia, 

SPKOIAL    ()lU)i;.l^  ) 

No.  U-l.  \ 

VI 11... A.  board,  lo  cousisl  of  Colouol  S.  (Jrutchtiold, 
Lic-iitoiKtnt-Coloiiel  H.  8nowde;i  Aiidrows,  and  Major 
B.  P.  Joiu>.s  is  hei'cby  appoiiit(Ml  to  inpot  at  the  camp 
c>r  the  artillery  of  the  I'd  (.-orps  oi,  the  lOth  instant, 
or  as  «u)u  there-alter  a.s  practieahle,  to  oxi)reHS  an' 
opinion  a.s  to  the  proper  ]>r()portion  of  projectiles  to 
accompany  tlie  12-pounder  Napoleon,' the  lO-pounder 
Panott,  and  :Mnei]  l^ifle  guns;  at.so,  whether  the  effi- 
c:it^ncy  of  artillery  Aviil  he  impaired  by  omitting  the 
l)rolonge  with  the  -•un-carrian-e,  and  extra  wheel  and 
axle  with  the  caists^m. 

By  conHna}id  of  General  Lkk. 

W.    W.  TAYLOK, 

A.  A.  General 


lu  t'olST    or    KOARJ)  OF  AlJTILLKRY    OmCKR.S    OONVKNKD 

nv  viariiK  of  Speciai,  Orokr.  N(j.  1J4,  IlKAn-QUAJt- 
T>;it.s  .\.  .\.  v.,  April  4.  18(;::i. 

liead-quarters  Arfilkry  'Id  Corp,'s,  April  10, 1803. 
The  br»ard  met  at  one  o'clock,  p.  m.,  pm-8nant  to 
Special  Oi'der,  A'o.  lU,  ]lead-<iJmrler8  A.  N.  V.,  current 
14 


162  APPENDIX. 

series.  After  due  consideration  of  the  several  ques- 
tions therein  submitted  to  us,  we  have  the  honor  to 
submit  the  following  report : 

1.  We  deem  it  decidedly  inexpedient  to  abandon 
the  2:>rolonge  on  gun-carriages.  It  is  liglit  in  weiglu, 
while  experience  has  shown  it  exceedingly  valuable 
in  a  campaign — indeed,  almost  indispensable.  It  has 
several  times  happened  during  the  ])ast  year,  in  this 
command,  that  the  pintle-hook  on  the  gun-limber  has 
given  aw^ay,  and  then  the  gun  was  carried  by  bending 
a  pole  over  the  limber  and  lashing  to  it  with  tlie  pro- 
lonffe  the  lunette.  Without  this  resource  the  gun  or 
its  caisson,  one*,  w^ould  have  been  abandoned  of  neces- 
sity. Again,  the  prolonge  has  been  found  invaluable 
in  'hauling  the  gun  up  steep  declivities  and  through 
very  bad  roads.  ,, 

2.  We  also  deem  it  inexpedient  to  give  up  the  fifth 
wheel  on  the  caissons.  It  is  very  heavy,  and  much 
increases  the  draft,  but  spare  wheels  are  always 
needed  after  a  battle;  and,  in  dry  w^eather,  on  hard 
roads,  it  is  very  often  necessary  to  take  off  the  wheels 
and  cut  the  tires  if  circumstances  permit,  Avhile,  if 
they  do  not,  some  of  the  wheels  give  w\ay  entirely, 
and  these  fifth  wheels  are  the  onlj^  resource  in  the 
case. 

3.  We  believe  that  the  best  pro]3ortion  for  the  sev- 
eral kinds  of  ammunition  for  12-pounder  JNapoleon 
guns  is  as  follows :  In  each  ammunition-chest,  eight 
rounds  solid  shot,  fixed;  sixteen  rounds  spherical-case 
shot,  fixed;  four  rounds  shell,  fixed;  and  three  rounds 
canister,  fixed.  And  then  we  would  recommend  that 
there  be  made  for  each  gun  eight  rounds  of  canister, 
thus  :  The  tin  canister  to  be  of  the  present  size,  and, 
instead  of  being  charged  with  the  twenty -seven  ordi- 


APPENDIX.  1G3 

]iary  iron  shot,  to  bo  IIIKmI  with  round   inuskct-biillets 

of  calibre  0.09.     No  cartrid<>;es  to  bo  attached  to  ov 

])rovidod   for  these  canister.     They  are  to  be  carried 
two  in  each  chest,  placed  in  the  farther  end  of  tlio 

division  appropriated  to  canister,  and  sitting  one  on 

tlie  top  of  the  other.     They  are  to  be  used  either  on 

top  of  an   ordinary  canister,  or  on   a  solid   shot,   at 

short  range,  when  it  is  believed  they  will  })rove  highly 

efficient.     Thus  there  are  reaWyfive  rounds  of  canister 

in  each  chest,  three  being  fixed  and  two  not. 

4.  Each  of  the  ammunition-chests  of  the  10-poundor 

Parrott  or  ']-incli  rifled  gun,  is  capable  of  canying 

sixt}'  rounds  of  ammunition,  so  that  all  four   boxes 

carry  two  hundred  and  forty  rounds.    This  we  believe 

to   be  too   much.     Two   hundred    rounds   should    be 

enough  for  one  engagement,  and  one  hundred  and 

eighty  rounds  in  the  caisson  form  a  load  far  too  heavy 

foi'  six  horses.    As  it  would  not  be  advisable  1<>  change 

the  dimensions  of  these  boxes,  we  recommend  that 

the    four    shall    cany    only    two    hundred    and    four 

rounds.     And  to  dispose  the  load  as  advantageously 

as  possible  that  this  reduction  of  thirty-six  rounds 

be  made  in  the  rear  chest  of  the  caisson,  while  the  <li- 

visions  thus  left  vacant  be  devoted  to  carrying  fuze- 

ignitors,  except  of  course  the  number  necessary  to  be 

carried  in  the  gun -limber  box  for  use  with  the  gun, 

should   it  become  separated  from  its  caisson.     Thus 

the  chests  on  the  limbers  will  be  filled  to  their  full 

capacity  of  sixty  rounds  each.     So  will   the    middle 

chest.     In  each  of  these  chests  we  recommend  that 

there  be  carried  six  roundsof  canister,  eighteen  shells, 

and  thirty-six  rounds  of  shrapnel;  while  in  the  rear 

chest,  which  carries  but  thirty-six  rounds  in  all,  there 

should   bo   twenty-lnui'    shrnpnol    and    twelve   shells, 


1  64  A^TENDIX . 

making  a  total  for  each  gun  of  eighteen  canisters,  one 
hundred  and  thirt^^-two  case-shot,  and  sixty-six  shells. 
We  have  the  honor  to  remain, 

A^ery  respect'y,  your  ob't  serv'ts, 
(Signed)  S.  ORUTCHFIELD, 

Colonel  and  Chief  Artillery  2d  Corp^. 
■  (Signed;  W.  SNOWDE^  ANDREWS/^^ 

Lieutenant- Colonel  commanding  Battalion  Artillery. 

(Signed)  li.  P.  JONES, 

jMajor  commanding  Battalion  Artillery. 
Major  Taylor, 

A.  A^  General. 


"■••  I  ilo  ji'dt  coii(-nr  with  tlie  other  members  of  the  board  in  regaril  to 
the  filih  \vli«el  on  tiio  caissons.  I  respectfully  recommend  that  only 
the  alteruiite  caissons  shall  carry  a  fifth  wheel.  This  will  give  two 
spare  wheels  to  each  four-gun  batrery,  and  eight  to  a  battalion,  suffi- 
cient in  my  judgment  to  meet  any  ordinary  emergency.  Weak  or  dis- 
abled teams  can  be  thus  relieved,  and  entire  teams  kept  from  breakiui;,- 
down.  Tlie  horses  of  the  caissims  have  always  sullcred  morL'  than 
those  of  the  guns.  The  weights  of  caisson  and  gun,  liijht  12-ponniUr, 
or  Napoleon,  equipped  for  field  service,  differ  only  forty-six  pounds, 
why,  then,  should  one  team  suffer  more  than  the  other,  because  iVuui 
the  weight  of  the  rear  chest  and  the  spare  wheel  exercising  by  their 
positions  a  leverage  which  changes  the  line  of  draught  very  seriously 
whenever  the  rear  Avheels  are  below  the  ])lane  of  the  front — fur  in- 
stance, when  in  a  hole  or  ascending  a  hill.  The  weight  of  the  fifth 
wheel  is  one  hundred  and  eighty  pounds;  at  times  it  exerts  by  it:* 
position,  by  changing  the  line  of  draught,  more  tluiu  the  C(iuivalent  o( 
live,  hundred  pounds.  Believing  eight  spare  wheels  to  be  sufficient  for 
a  battalion  of  four  companies,  I  again  respectfully  recommend  that 
only  the  alternate  caissons  shall  carry  a  fifth  wheel. 

R.  SNOWDEN  ANDREWS, 
Lieuioiant-Colonel  cum/nandiny  liuttaliim  Artillery. 


Pl.    / 


OF    THE 

SIGNS       IN       THE     P  LAT  ES 


Lxmher  th'a^m  bi/  si-x-  ?"-7'oyo 
PvfCe.'  tfi  ha^iay, 

nu*:/f '  of  ccixaSS<jii . 
tim-.^CTurt  yrurvcfxXc^'. 
((j(7titxiToc&-  ait  hi s  ric'sl 


;5^ 


SCALE       OF     y  "I  R  D  S 


>l 


PL.    Z 


z 

O 

z 

o 

o 
a. 
< 
z 


=^ 


^ 


^ 

^ 


S< 


L__ 


'^^ 


^ 


r 


5 

-I 


2  •? 


:; 

-&^ 

1 

"O 

L- 

^    o 


1 

1  ^  ^. 

SI 

'^  ^  ^ 

F^ 

V  y^    >« 

\^ 

^ 


1^ 

5 


Pi.  3 


1 


Xj  ^  ^  *•:?  ^  »"  ^'  ^"  \^" 


i-  r.M 


Cort swell,  uMi-,  CoUun.hux, 


Pi.    s 


to 


^^ 


5>)  K$ 


>  R 


-     ^    V  rC 


'  ^  5^  '-^ "- 


^   .C 


15 


Pl.    6 


JEvoaw  ^  Ccqcv/dZ,  liih,  Cclu^MU'^S  C 


Pj.       7 


F    1  C        6 


FIG      7 


A?:-,/  im<{i'/yn  o^'  Tlr.Kt/ 


'ecn  ic^  nn  "Jk^i  r:  / ' XroLoO 


TlixrJ  mr^  ^nc^  c^'  ISvJdt 


^yanj  *  Cca,jr,"/Z.  hih^  CotujnJn/x,  S,  C 


PL      8 


FIG       9 


JkrviT^Ti  TTivixvn.  ct    Lo(jl<)( 


uc<^t^  rn<rixvJi  o/\)jt/.mae . 


I]van£  ^  Co^jyvtU,  Zvtk,  Couxrnjpxa  SO 


Pl      9 


/TvcrcC  7tiofi<  n  <f  fSp  oriAJ^ 


f,  1 1 7  ill  niJ-rir  an  <.  / '  <9p  .Ttffc 


fiyoji.^  R  (xxT^'ty^'U..  UVv  '^obu^-hjcv.,'*   C 


PL        /O 


F  I   G 


jSa-sl,  rri'OtKrTc    o/^  Rccrn. 


^evontJ  rnfti^jri  iH'  .Ttcitn 


T.you-t-}  i  U^^YjiJl  Iilh-,  LoO-unh^.'S  C 


/"t  // 


FIG        16 


V**"  l  ^ecrt:yiTia  a/n/rn/yirffcn  fr'^nJP'.^ 


.       PL       /2 


JXeetcl- 


*J/ 


FIG.    19 


^V    •>  tff/nn-iTi fj    am/rta/ijfionyfvJV     i- 


jSyocris  ii  Cop.-veU,c.Si   ColarrcbiM  oC 


/=>i.   /2f 


PL.       /^ 


%wm- 


FIC     22 


ifc 


Hi  A 


m..Mdh 


KV 


FIC      25. 
Zt;/?  Ah'jtvt 


^ 


'^% 


■^ 


no.  23 


•al'^ 


1' 


FIC  ;  a 6 


M 


I! 
Iff 


*^/?7  r/  T^K^TrtAtrc/i 


St^'^i^O  "^ 


* .1  I'.v/r^ 


^ 


F'O     2  +  . 


^B^ 


IM 


'1 


M.  -.1 


1 


1.      .1. . 
I 

.  I'V^I 

H 


Orr9^r  in.  &^(.uinn 


I 


.Eveiti^  ^  CndsY/Ui^  li'Jv,  CcIv-TTJ.hva,  S  C 


%^. 


Pi   /5 


m 


i  -m 


'% 


V. 


F  1  0  .'   I 


;     IB! 


29 


in 


Iril 

I  EH 


i  -m^\ 


It 
.» 

el 


;t:;    .,;'K 


Afi:)!! 


")l 


¥, 


A«)l 


2!      ^ 


"11 

l-CTi 


llli 


iLl 


If 


F    1    G 


tei 


3  0 


Oi;iff  tn  Biittertf 


PL    /6 

1 


4^^ 


|^^2-r    i5^M&^.-^-::^ 


o 


i""^^' 


m   i 


-^mi^  j^^ 


-ta^  •"••r 


-«:«r5!<9fl 


n"      .'is^;;^^!.^®!  r  «^  - 


FIG      32' 


IS^WL^  -^"^^^ 


!i^^"-r   ::^^^i^  ^ 


'/;  M,nrh    htj  ,t    t'bmJ. 


livoi-Tis  S  Co^Srydi.  UXiy  ColpjTibw.. . 


m 


4     ll( 


i       ^li 


PL         /7 


^ 

\ 


F  X 


■'K 


>. 


^^ 


<(? 


\fX 


<c^' 


F  I  0       33  . 


^ 


H 


>e< 


^■•■-  *    ft 


;: 


1^ 


le/1      Ohb'ifUA'. 


PL      /i 


'1 


FIG.     34. 


4 


i 


U 


'+^ 


li 
III. 

f 


IB 


IFn 


head  rf  CcUi-ian   lvOi>:  .Le/l. 


/ii 


FIG.    35 


/&     " 


K^l 


^ 


1^ 


^a1 

1^ 


K31 


//y  /^^.  HjxjktBreiJLkSe-ciK-TLS 


J 


PL.    19 


/•^  20 


^¥1 
hh 


f-i 


Ha 


1 


:4i- 


k 


FIG.       37 


II 


m 


■HEH 


m 


1^ 


K3I 

i 

.     Hi 

w 
It 


i 


Ilk 

Tip; 

i 

4 


Jh^-0  Jj ui4:.  Hxxeyiv  lJ-t4i.Ittotr 


i 


IS]; 


-V^'W  ^  ConjweZL,  Ivth,  'ZohzTv.'bioLjS  C 


/%  ,   2/ 


mm^  ^^^^^- 


■rift  I  rlr  'WiTT  T    *^^^^-' 


u-!r 


L-:LI 


r^« 


A 


FIG.         38  . 


7^ •  r/u  Le f  't.  7 fi-ir ■  Inn.  e 


^6l 


^-1 


t 


i 
13 


/./•^/io  ."'  !'(SsYtcZl,  liihr  (>>Lajr>ii,'  ■' 


^ 


^m 


£p 


la^g:*;  ^c:«ss 


-tf 


-l-g|g:Mr  ^t}ssr£ 


!"■« 


■3^5» 


^ 
K 


1^ 


FIG      39 


^>^'  fh^  TiMfh^  iri^' <Jjiiifi 


/°^    22 


PL      23 


Evam  S  Ccg^wcU 


FIG       40 


0 


# 


ii 

K14 


I     4ii 

8 


Hi 

I 

HI 

i 

rt.H 

1        II 


^ 


fc5H 
•1^ 


it 


'^' 


if 


i'ai 


ii 


H 


i 


\     II] 


m 


4li    ^    M 


11 
4(^ 


IHi 


^ 


fa 


TvJh-tnk  nJ,   <'t^/'4/iiJi  Ii   Hit-   fhorxk 


u, 


u 


FIG     41 


M 


i 


P 


^■ 


K^    J^l 


^~ 


II 


ill; 

III 


II 

Ul 

It 

li 

*^ 

II 
II 

i 


g 


-:l^^fe  ^MS 


Tc'  Ur-fAxk  inic  O-b^^rvny  io  t^Xe/^. 


■^y^y-^is,^  Coc/o->^-tll  tiih..'Lolui..mlwL  S  C' 


/■-'  L  IS 


Fl  C     42 


FS1-S^^EI-1: 


I'    ' 

I' 

Hi!  W 


III 


ii^ESKiSHSf^SiS 


M^^-^ 


^-5P^:^  ^i^M!^ 


JoJif^j^^Ji   tf\in  Ihc  R^qhi-  ^<-  rrtui'ch  fc  tfn   Le^f 


£vcin.-  ^  <■■•  >-,  ~'..-^/7  '".,/-,„/,., 


^ 

1   m 

l» 

II 

n 

w 

'?' 

H3H 

^^ 

•f 

/'il     2  6 


# 


ii 

i 

hfl 


r? 


v^, 

^ 


i>M 


¥ 


m 


t--i 


K3| 


KP1 


f5^ 


FIG.       43. 


T<   Rtji,  Donhle.  U<lrxTi^i 


'■yru:  ft  'Soosv.  Ul.  Izth.  Ct'jhurib 


UuiiPUi .,,    ( 


/'I.     Z7 


% 


i 


1|! 


fipl 


FES 


!| 


til' 


•7  ■■     7  ■  -tei 


^r 


»      I 


M 


& 


FIG.    -^4 


TuDi^ilou^bhjtVwtMjf  Cchtmn  inf(  T.in4t  ^cfJiefrorA 


tf  (o^smeiL  ijMh,  Cdambux^  S 


Pl    26 


ten 


/i     Ui 

g 


FIG    A5 


J4^W^^ 


i^-^j 


4 


■*►  ^'l^ 


1^ 


■^  npatr^^^a>» 


2:1^1*:  -K!!!^ 


^^P'^  -Si^^- 


Y^mm^  ^ 


•ii 


hII^^^  --t^;^-^-? 


Floii,L  Ma?-c7t 


k  G(j()oA/e7) ,  ifJrt  ('Ajhwi-ljUi  S  C 


PL     Z9 


FIG     46. 


1-2 


I-rmM^-  ■  -rS 


^jggg^  -^i^S 


1-i 


# 


*  < 


ff 


% 


-0 


P 

/ 


-s^ 


>^; 


■«t 


->-qge^  -f^M^ 


M«^  Ubiiqur  Mittch 


r 


PL.     30 


m 

%  m 

^ 

1   m 

¥ 

m 

1 

IS 
i 

IS 

1^^ 

^'  ^ 

! 

f 

a 

a 

M 

a 

u 

14 

ii 

H^Jl 

iU 

i  ui 

u 

IS 

1' 

¥ 

ii 

U 

i 

11 

1^1 

Hih 

M 

'^^ 

m 

ill 

^ 


'^. 


■;5A 


^^ 


^ 


^ 


m 


^ 


^^ 


-'.'^;; 


^# 


1^ 


•^ 


FIO.  47.       ^ 


I'/i.ai'ft  nl' Thrf^-hrv  jit  Zinr. 


,.-r.>rli^lvtfly~0'ur' 


J°L       3/ 


H:j1  C^M  \a\  fc>l  P^ 

iV  iji  4'  ^i-^  '1 

M<  M  M  Ml  M 

#  i  II  m  11 

^,   i|  iS  i  li^  i 

M        I-:'  •-■JI  Itpl  H^l  ^:;?^ 

t^    h;t^  H3I  ^e^  f^  e^ 


FjC    48 


l\       ^. 


^1 


i^ 


1' 
HI 


^ 


/I 


m 
Ifo' 


^:^ 


•4' 


1f. 


IfJI 


VJ"  H/'i^c  Inters  al« 


v;,.-'^   ^'    C\I^<a;''    ;if . . -'-A  v  }?' .x 


PL.     3Z 


1 

u 


i    &J 


l":i 


I  t^ 


r^ 
i-^ 


O 


i 


FIG,    49. 


1 


I 


_  i^       I  I  1^  » 

pf  Kpt  ■      ra  Jipl  M  M 

f  ttt  ••+  I^H  4'  +* 

'^  M  to  te  *:i  i 


IN 


l^l     ii     , 

H^      l+tii       K^-H       lf^.1       If^+I       t^H 


Ti! Rtysnrrn'^  Jti tfi-V(il,s 


4M 


J!yan<?  ^  'ujaswtul,  iith,  Cohvabha..  S  C 


Pi.     Z3 


m 


\     .t    jf*    .t    .if 


*ii 

^A 

:^ 

*¥    ' 

1    n 

■^ 

t 

m 


FIG.     50  . 


HTi 


Bi 


H3t 


^Z^rti•■.,^v^lh.Pl^^ces  ni  I'rr/tl.ix'thmnj/iiBiiottejnj'h'fJ-ie  Fnnt 


m 


f 


1'       .'I' 

I 


irai 


\k 


\n\ 


If* 


i 


4^ 


ML) 
I 


FIC      51 


'3i,Lrfit>,^vxlh  ('fxtssanizrvT^my;  tr,  Hnnn  i7iJ^<(.^(jif  tcthtiPrimi^ 


/Crouos  <5  'U)(/jn*il  !jfi*^Gtbunti,'> 


PC    34- 


^ 


i^'T*"  m 


3! 


^1 


V=A 


-t. 


fOi 


FlC.    5  2 


it3i 


,    i  f 


tBi 


^B^ 


13) 
[91 


l!4 


Hi-H! 


InJjijht.  m^u^^iex:'€SxrvB\^^rtZ}irn'rwm.BdRern^'tA7&.s  IR^ccr. 


'.'V'v 


"E^ 

o 


1^- 


+a 


M 


m 


% 


FIG.      53 


I- 
4.' 


P 
ft 

If 


tS! 


H3f 

if 


h^ 


KrH 


4+-'      ^-k"      ^-i^       ili 


.;^/  Zmr.;  wr?/'  <^^aw<.?  trvJrvrd)  ivif^T^rvy^n.^otHer^fivf^^  TUfxr 


Ewrais:  (j>Q5vM  U'Uh,  Colwiika,  S  C. 


P^    3S 


f 


^M 


4^'      I      ii 


^i\ 


«      i 


tai 


o 

FIO 


4-^ 


4^ 

|r::| 


54. 


K7H 


If' 


g 


1 

i 


1^ 
1^ 


FIO 


i 


it3i 


l<^ 


55 


biJSoriienjj  Jo  inrrn  ui  Line  to  M^  ]^fmi,'mth  CaxsmTis  in  J^vnt.^  IfuJjrvm.- 


iJ\  luus  ^  CcasirfZLy  Idh, 


PL      36 


■+  It  -^^  -t  '-^1^  .t 


4     ^h 


F  10 

»S6. 

ll< 

;!' 

itH 

M 

1 

it 

$ 

a 

I-tJ 

lii 

l^ 

-^ 

kiji 


li 


n    I 


rn.JBoUt-erj^JvfniTii  niljine.JoTr.h.i'.Bj'aj'.'r^if'h  t'-n aeon y,  m  FrnTih 


^      4    ^^ 


4i  ^ 


^ 


M 


M 


F  1  C  .    5  7 


^Ai 


K-^ 


f 

O 


[lA^H 


fel 


ei 


_1. 


KL>( 


im    f 


|4'  iV  ti+"  l|4 


4i 


A/  IJaR.*-/!^  l/jfhnn  m  Live  h'^fiy  Tf^ar,   wil-h  I:'ie(  t's  m   tron^ . 


TjVou-i-s  S:  CoqswdJ .  Utiv,  C-vlMmhia.,  5, 


PL      37 


Hi 


¥  Jl'  .+  .^ft  iff 


m 


'*! 


1        i 
i       1 

1'^  K;ij 


H--( 


III 

1 

ICH 


■^ 

44 

M 

1 

IS 

H 

1 

3"^ 

M'  1 

H::H 

M 

I'^W 

1*^ 

H^iH 

X 

/'" 

1 

1 


r;  0  .   S8 


1^ 


t9< 


^  ,'  '/zeni.n,  wiihlhecf'o  at  J^vni'^  ba  form,  in  /ioM*:f~(j  t,.  fiie  Jprtrnf'. 


i^xftu  Sf  'Jv.-M  V  .>rA,  "clivn^",,:  0 


=•--==[1 


i 


1^ 


t     .r     .+'  •   .t 


i 


K  •" 


FIG     59 


It 


\,  i$h 


to  ij^iAi/  £rcrTtJb' 


E-vou'iA,  &  0)Cf£.y)'eR,  TmUu,  Colunobiay.  S-0. 


IP 


PL     39 


fa 


fet 


w 


5 


lo» 


i 


i-t 


I  V. 


FlC  .      60  . 


t!-:ij  I 


M 


feii 


ii/  4l./  4i  ii 


f , 


»     »1 


Jp  f'c/fxmv.finffi^r£«smyfr(mJ:f'bo  fhrrn-iniSatJJznf 6? ififSjC/tr' 


fy,7JTjS  ^  Coojs-wdh,  h/h,  Colwnbuxj,  S.  C. 


Pu  ■4-0 


ft 


t-S 


ii 


i 


tl^-     \- 


r\<i.    6i 


It 

It 

o 

1 

tt 

1* 

I' 


il^"  \A\     -J 


m 

h 


tt 


#1 

n 

is 


m 


? 


lEva/ijS  8-  Cflo^wll  iixh.',  ^oluTTLtiiii,  c  C 


PL     4-/ 


l^- 


m"'\ 


■  4-f+  -^^- 


^B^H^ 


^^^m^ 


^s^m^i 


^ 
m 


m' '  \ 


..m-] 


^^JE! 


^^^ 


^^n^r^ 


I 


J     M 


^  I 


■9»-— 


FIG.     6  2 


lEvari^  §  Cogswell,  l>^,  Columbia,,  S  C. 


fL     -f  Z 


lihiir" 


2»^_«i 


::a^: 


^mm: 


F  H)  .      6  3 


^mm 


mm 


fc  ^[. 


m 

Hi 

'm 

lA, 


i 


t 


Ev:l'7'!s    i   OiCl'-yfVJ'-'h  , 


Hl^-litr. 


§5.*K!rr 


■^^mm$. 


Mmt^ft 


^-imi^t. 


-5i^fe*t^ 


^ 

/'^     ^3 

1 
1 

i 
i 

zmmm 

*v  ^ 

j 

l?t«:        -^-  ■ 

\ 

1 

A 

1 
1         • 

1 

l^^ 


K?1 


^ 


«  i^^' 


no     6  4. 


t<:^ 


tn  folftmntyii/t  A^v--*  '//  h'n  ni  Jv  form   u,  Jiuihoi^U    Hi,-  Hujhl 
fftUli  iruf  (jrc  •  rtj  I,  ■  i/i^.  l.rf^ 


J'/l'.O     Oj  IjUOOAf 


fljL       'f-4- 


mmm.: 


ft 


-i" 


m  ^ 

^\ ...  4^ 


■^S^l^l 


-S 


^m. 


i-^ 


3SBi£-l 


^3E£- 


-ci. 


12 


FIG.     6  5 


* 


i^ 


^7,  Mccnvfi,  With  Ufctf6,mb  ->n  Fronh^  ^rni  xn^BcnXhcry  be 

Hvaht . 


r-7-p 


Pl     4  5 


s^^:;         :S^2» 


'SMU^--  «2t2Slt^' 


n-^m 


%^3tM\±^.\ '  ■}!+- 


?^'   i|l 


^ 


-^      4«1]3      '      1^^^\ 


II   -'-'    #;«#^ 


1st- 


^ 


no.    66 


aaxnx:na  a> 


r-cujuil  fv  tfn'  Ij*'^ 


'Ryafii  £■  (oo;^<iO,iit.L  //•Iirr.'rr.J^S  0 


P^     -t- 6' 


is 


lEH 


1^ 


i 


\\i  -m 
m 


^Hmm 


FIG        67 


^       rf 


,°i.     -*7 


I-II^I^SC 


.#1^«t         -T- 


WJBkH^ 


'x*  '-T-    i^ 


:«i8^r 


i£jiil«i'3^i»' 


■      6  (ft 


i€l   rpfin^-lfi 


FIG.     68 


^ - % 


isei^ 


e& 


Mffii^   '     ^fe-ie 


iiliBflE>-" 


In  Miitfier-y,  h'MatYfi  U  t.h^  L''^  <^  /Ta-/"  <»</<<v/f  >"  Hatfrr^f 


PL.      ^8 


F  I  0  .      69, 


u 


If  - 


.11 

i 

t 

u 


^      I 


l«ft 


Kpi 


I 


Ml 

i 


.l^l , 


'^ 


M 


A    • 


t 


117 


hcJiiU'TI 


3.y' 


Pl    49 


m 


t^ 


1 

If 

w 


t^ 


A 


M 


If 
n 


fwH 


1^ 


y+'j    kf. 


«ia 


1? 


m 


f^ 


?!f'i    VV. 


m 

lol 


*^ 


te^ 


^-i| 


i 


FIG.      70. 


Z?  Pii-r^  fv  Ih^  /iV/  r./* . 


K.  (/u  ^  C>.i.s- Yf  ,'w,  & .V; ,  I " ' >t/' ' **•-.'_  .  f  ' 


r 


P  L     50 


4 


m 


% 


g 


■5-: 


^SS:         --:r 


t 


F 10.     71 . 


■-* 


-* 


z^. 


t|+   ■      ._-t|f5»^t!        et 


ICH 


urn 


HrH 


H=H 


^ 


^%^,' 


^•<<'  lo^heFxxiTti-   Ch^jurjue^Trtmlfmyv'trd  i,n  FirshPif/ir.. 


B'voun-s  *  &05-H  fll,  fdlv  i^oi^jaoui ,  .:^^ ' 


Pi.    Si' 


m 


, lUec 


4|4      f  i'-if!Mtea^l 


H::H 


i 


'ihSi 


■iiasE^^- 


-■--^v-3 


FIG.     72 


I5» 
PI 


H^ 


-Twv  Ir  thii  Ftu/Jit      Chtinae Pr\nil  l4>4te.t>r  <.>rf  Jiiaht  /^♦'.v. 


^y,tn£  Cf  Cicij-AtU ,lC!h ^'^Uwib:jx, ,!.  f 


PL     *2 


B 


152 
»BE 


w^. 


■^. 


> 


FIG.      73 


^     •o 


I 


r<i 


5  T< 


'CV. 


Onlei^TTL  Lxnjty,  JJxsrnvujxUd 


f/ 

Cap-touux.. 

I 

LveuJbmMitl. 

Is 

Firsfj  &ryieajit: 

qs. 

Qtzoirljemvajiler 

Serae<tnt/ 

S 

Serae4xriT.. 

s. 

yS,  Otm  BebxxihjTvervt. 

J 

Gnmrver. 

a 

^li/lcjers. 

h.  Suqltrrs. 

FIO      74- 


^1-53 


u  s 


^^ 


^r^z«5 


EE3EEf'^ 


cm    n 


EESE^' 


k 


^st 


'^^ 


\ 


mws^ 


lA.'hiinn   <>f'T'lct1'ociL« 


"Ereuu  4"  CoqswtH,  ^f3h.  Colwni:./ , .  '■ 


l*t  I 


S'* 


BUGLE        SIGNALS 


I     M  A  R  C^l    POR   cjEview 


ppp^^is&i^^lll 


T»:p 


§^^^^^^m^^ 


^^s 


1^ 


^Ip^^^ilS^^B 


*\  1  f  !•»  p  ]S~rrvT^ 


i 


Exfixi 


^^ 


>  t  fM- 


q    I  1 


?-i — ^ 


^^ 


tra: 


^^ 


■4-H — u 


^ 


^^^n^ 


^-.hj^^- 


■*-        CALCP 


fe^^^i^^^^^ 


=jj 


/".yj.'.-K'c!/,  l'7Ji'/Jr7;xrJ>ir^.' 


55 


HI  M 


5         H  A  LT  . 


:rzz?t 


^s^_^ 


g^^^ 


•         rO^WARD 


7.     HEAD      or       COLUMN    T«    TMt    moMr. 

I        I       f       I  __jr^ 


i 


1 


8        MtAD    OF.COl.UMNT»TME    LEFT 


n  I  r  1' 


9.     niCHT     OBUI^UE 
*^*^         ^ Jft 


^m  . 


10     .    L.KFT     •!  LIAWK 


^Zi«;r 


gL-Efc^I^^ 


II.    A  aou  T 


&  jlPir^  jf^ 


m 


\Z      .  COUNTmMAPCH 


i*ct^.<  &  ^tcswfU.bJ^h  Ofuniljiwi)  r, 


J^  3. 


13.     ORlv'ERS    MOuKT. 


li^^iP 


BE 

1+    DRIVERS   DISMOUNT 


i=: 


^5^l> 


15  ,  CANNOHECRS     MOUNT 


MU-jT-' 


US 


p 


16        IN    BATTERY 


^mm^^^ 


17-     COMMENCE    FIRING 


^H^^^ 


la    .    CEASt    riRlMC 


^ 


19       BOOTS    t    SADDLES 


^P 


^tf 


^^P^ 


!fV«-ir  1^  Ojf^swtU  ivtii  C/aiT'lfta,,  5  C 


J^  4. 


60  THE      GENERAL 


.«--r. 


iJlH* 


ai         TO       HORSE 


5_ 


^^p^^^g=gntr  [.r  ^  jb 


ti.      ASSEMBLY 

€• —  .•Tf  _  P    f 


pJip^Sj^^z^j^q^} 


11 


^v^ 


ss 


23  .      THE      PE  vri  LLE 


m 


11^  J-^if  r[p^^ 


^p 


;^>l=>;t 


^^ 


3E^£f 


J>C 


'.A-         STABLE      CALL 


JOO 


iz 


-i-^-t 


•J 


2  5  WATERING       CALL 

— »- 


^^ 


|l 


2  6        B  R  EAK  TA  ST. 


.3V.vi.r  jf  Cf'cisyvelZ  Ziih,  Colvum2riaL. 


53 


j^r  o 


£T         ASSEMBLY      OF    BUCLERS 


w 


3  V 


m 


^ 


E 


w~w    y 


^ 


P 


»  f  f    i>      p 


Jzlf^M^t^g^  ITL 


'^    N 


o> 


^ 


'^^ 


« — #-# 


liCIi 


ZR.ASSEMBI-Y      OF     GUARD. 


^ 


s 


fHH 


|l:^:zjl 


t  -^  p-A  p    p    p      I    f~  w~^ 


^m 


y-^ 


I 


.^  I  fjP-^ 


[^rro^^g^ 


^=F^ 


I 


29         F  ATIGU  E      CALL 


f    r  r  f 


fe^ 


.zr-iEM-i 


^^^P^^^i 


_  I  I    I  _  p  _  I  r  r  fV  r  I  _  ■  _  I  f    it---/.  _  i  _— £ 


so.       DRILL       CALL. 


Ji'-j.is.S-.  (xjqsrrc^U,  lvl\  Ccluru'bzjL,.'  C 


PI  7 


rv^v^-  f  f^,fjS\//UX,  ^'ih  f'/i.-iy/ihr./ 


PI  8 


34-      RFTRfAl 


^ 


■i£ 


~-i 


fcii 


g 


i 


-ds  tj.  o'upu*l,nttn/  tv  ^  rrn'7/<-     9 


i^t:: 


i^^^;^^!^^^ 


i^rt 


«  ■  »   ! 


:,n±t-=iMi^^£3 


^ 


^^^lipp^^ 


Efe^ 


--^ 


Jviu/i-''  ^'  fjC<j!'NeTiv,  h^i  O\:;rr,b\o  i 


J 


I 


